manualshive.com logo in svg

Ricoh M281 Series, Service Manual

The Ricoh M281 Series Technical Training Manual is a comprehensive manual designed to provide users with in-depth knowledge about their Ricoh M281 printer. Available for free download from manualshive.com, this manual offers step-by-step instructions and troubleshooting tips to optimize the performance of your printer.

Share
Download
background image

Printer Service Mode 

 

SM Appendix 

3-151 

D255/D256/M281/M282 

SP

 Mo

d

e

 T

ab

les

 

 

1001  Bit Switch 

002  Bit Switch 2 

0 

1 

 

bit 0 

Not used

 

- 

- 

 

bit 1 

DFU

 

- 

- 

 

bit 2 

Not used

 

- 

- 

 

bit 3 

[PCL5e/c.PS]: PDL Auto Switching

 

Enabled

 

Disabled 

Enables/disable the MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job. 

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto 

PDL switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly. 

 

bit 4 

Not used

 

- 

- 

 

bit 5 

DFU

 

- 

- 

 

bit 6 

Not used

 

- 

- 

 

bit 7 

DFU

 

- 

- 

 

1001  Bit Switch 

003  Bit Switch 3 

0 

1 

 

bit 0 

to 1 

DFU

 

- 

- 

 

bit 2 

[PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility

 

Disabled

 

Enabled 

Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000. 

In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") 

will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A". 

 

bit 3 

to 7 

DFU

 

- 

- 

 

1001  Bit Switch 

004  Bit Switch 4 

0 

1 

Summary of Contents for M281 Series

Page 1: ...D255 D256 M281 M282 SERVICE MANUAL ...

Page 2: ... PERMISSION OF RICOH USA Inc All product names domain names or product illustrations including desktop images used in this document are trademarks registered trademarks or the property of their respective companies They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for the benefit of such companies No such use or the use of any trade name or web site is intended t...

Page 3: ...A Inc Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury damage to property or loss of warranty protection Ricoh USA Inc WARNING ...

Page 4: ... D255 17 MP 501SPF TL MP 501SPF TL MP 501SPF TL D256 MP 601SPF MP 601SPF MP 601SPF M281 SP 5300DN SP 5300DN SP 5300DN M281 17 SP 5300DN TL MP 501SPF TL MP 501SPF TL M282 SP 5310DN SP 5310DN SP 5310DN DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV NO DATE COMMENTS 07 2016 Original Printing Rev 03 08 2017 ...

Page 5: ...ROCEDURE 2 8 2 2 4 SMC STORAGE 2 8 2 2 5 IMPORTANT NOTICE ON SECURITY ISSUES MP 501 601 ONLY 2 9 2 2 6 SETTINGS ACCORDING TO THE SERVICE CONTRACT 2 14 Meter Click Charge 2 14 2 2 7 MOVING THE MACHINE 2 15 2 2 8 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE 2 16 2 3 CASTER TABLE TYPE M24 D3C7 01 2 19 2 3 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 2 19 2 3 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 21 When installing with the paper feed unit 2 21 2 4 PAPER FEE...

Page 6: ...r Installing the HDD 2 106 2 9 INTERNAL OPTIONS 2 107 2 9 1 LIST OF SLOTS 2 107 2 10 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE M19 D3C0 17 2 108 2 10 1ACCESSORY CHECK 2 108 2 10 2INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 108 2 11IEEE 802 11 INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M24 M500 08 2 109 2 11 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 2 109 2 11 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 109 2 12 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT TYPE D D566 01 MP 501 601 ONLY 2 110 2 12 1ACCESSORY C...

Page 7: ... IPDS UNIT TYPE M24 M500 02 03 04 2 130 2 20 1ACCESSORY CHECK 2 130 2 20 2INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 130 2 21 VM CARD TYPE P8 M500 09 10 11 SP 5300 5310 ONLY 2 131 2 21 1ACCESSORY CHECK 2 131 2 21 2INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 131 2 22 DATAOVERWRITESECURITY UNIT TYPE M19 D3BS 03 MP 501 601 ONLY 2 132 2 22 1OVERVIEW 2 132 2 22 2ACCESSORY CHECK 2 132 2 22 3BEFORE YOU BEGIN THE PROCEDURE 2 133 Seal Check a...

Page 8: ...USERS 2 160 3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3 1 3 1 YIELD PARTS SETTINGS 3 1 3 1 1 YIELD PARTS REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 3 1 After installing the new yield parts 3 1 Operation check 3 2 4 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 4 1 4 1 NOTES ON THE MAIN POWER SWITCH 4 1 4 1 1 PUSH SWITCH 4 1 Characteristics of the Push Switch DC Switch 4 1 Shutdown Method 4 2 Forced Shutdown 4 2 4 2 BEFOREHAND 4 3 4 3 SPECIAL TOOLS 4 4 4...

Page 9: ... 38 4 6 15PAPER EXIT TRAY 4 39 4 6 16CONTROLLER COVER 4 45 4 7 EXTERIOR COVERS SP 5300 5310 4 47 4 7 1 UPPER COVER 4 47 4 7 2 FRONT COVER 4 50 4 7 3 RIGHT COVER 4 54 4 7 4 LEFT UPPER COVER 4 58 4 7 5 LEFT LOWER COVER 4 60 4 7 6 LEFT REAR COVER 4 61 4 7 7 REAR UPPER COVER 4 62 4 7 8 REAR MIDDLE COVER 4 64 4 7 9 REAR LOWER COVER 4 66 4 7 10CONTROLLER COVER 4 67 4 8 OPERATION PANEL MP 501 601 4 68 4 ...

Page 10: ...T UNIT MP 501 601 4 103 4 17 1PAPER EXIT UNIT 4 103 4 18 PAPER EXIT UNIT SP 5300 5310 4 107 4 18 1PAPER EXIT UNIT 4 107 4 19 PAPER FEED UNIT 4 111 4 19 1PAPER FEED ROLLER PICKUP ROLLER 4 111 4 19 2SEPARATION ROLLER 4 112 4 20 BYPASS TRAY UNIT 4 114 4 20 1BYPASS PAPER FEED ROLLER 4 114 4 21 DUPLEX UNIT 4 116 4 21 1DUPLEX UNIT 4 116 4 22 DRIVE UNIT 4 123 4 22 1PAPER FEED MOTOR 4 123 4 22 2MAIN DRIVE...

Page 11: ...1 601 ONLY 4 160 4 25 1ARDF UNIT 4 160 4 25 2ARDF PAPER FEED ROLLER ARDF PICKUP ROLLER 4 162 4 25 3ARDF FRICTION PAD 4 163 4 25 4ARDF INVERTER MOTOR 4 163 4 25 5ARDF PAPER FEED MOTOR ARDF PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR 4 165 4 26 PAPER FEED UNIT PAPER FEED UNIT PB1100 4 168 4 26 1PAPER FEED ROLLER PICKUP ROLLER 4 168 4 26 2SEPARATION ROLLER 4 169 4 26 3MAIN BOARD 4 171 4 26 4DRIVE UNIT 4 172 5 SYSTEM MAINT...

Page 12: ...APTURING THE DEBUG LOGS 5 35 5 5 1 OVERVIEW 5 35 Security of the Operation Log 5 37 5 5 2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOGS 5 37 Procedure for Retrieving the Debug Log 5 37 5 6 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD DOWNLOAD 5 40 5 6 1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD 5 40 5 6 2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM 5 41 5 7 UP SP DATA IMPORT EXPORT 5 43 5 7 1 OVERVIEW 5 43 Import export conditions 5 43 5 7 2 UP DATA IMPORT...

Page 13: ...DURE 5 58 MP 501 601 5 58 SP 5300 5310 5 60 5 9 3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS 5 61 5 9 4 ERROR MESSAGES 5 62 5 10 TEST PATTERN PRINTING 5 63 5 10 1MP 501 601 5 63 5 10 2SP 5300 5310 5 65 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 6 1 SELF DIAGNOSTIC MODE 6 1 6 1 1 SERVICE CALL CODES 6 1 Service Call Conditions 6 1 6 1 2 SC LOGGING 6 2 6 1 3 SC AUTOMATIC REBOOT MP 501 601 6 2 6 2 SERVICE CALL 101 195 6 5 6 2 1 SC...

Page 14: ...6 11 1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY 6 93 6 11 2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES 6 93 6 11 3 SENSOR LAYOUT 6 100 MP 501 601 6 100 SP 5300 5310 6 101 6 11 4 PAPER SIZE CODES 6 103 6 12 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 6 105 6 12 1IMAGE QUALITY 6 105 Skewed image 6 105 Toner sticking to the right side area on the second side of the paper 6 105 Image quality failure due to the fixing failure 6 107 Toner scattered 6 108 6 12 2P...

Page 15: ...l Components 7 11 MP 501 601 Others 7 12 SP 5300 5310 Others 7 13 7 2 SCANNER UNIT MP 501 601 ONLY 7 14 7 3 LASER UNIT 7 15 7 4 DEVELOPMENT UNIT 7 16 7 5 DRUM UNIT 7 17 7 5 1 DRUM 7 17 7 5 2 CLEANING UNIT 7 18 7 6 TRANSFER UNIT 7 19 7 7 FUSING UNIT 7 20 7 8 PAPER EXIT UNIT 7 22 7 9 DUPLEX UNIT 7 24 7 10 PAPER FEED UNIT 7 25 7 11BYPASS TRAY UNIT 7 27 7 12 ARDF MP 501 601 ONLY 7 28 7 12 1ORIGINAL FE...

Page 16: ......

Page 17: ...rks Adobe Acrobat PostScript and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Ricoh Company Ltd is under license Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and or its affiliates Macintosh OS X Bonj...

Page 18: ...soft Windows 7 Professional Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise The product names of Windows 8 are as follows Microsoft Windows 8 Microsoft Windows 8 Pro Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise The product names of Windows 8 1 are as follows Microsoft Windows 8 1 Microsoft Windows 8 1 Pro Microsoft Windows 8 1 Enterprise The product names of Windows 10 are as follows Microsoft Windo...

Page 19: ... Server 2012 Foundation Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Essentials Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Standard The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Foundation Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Essentials Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respe...

Page 20: ......

Page 21: ...PRODUCT INFORMATION REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 22: ......

Page 23: ...T INFORMATION 1 1 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS CONFIGURATION 1 1 1 MAIN MACHINE No Item Machine Code 1 MP 501SPF D255 17 NA D255 27 EU D255 29 AP MP 601SPF D256 17 NA D256 27 EU D256 29 AP 2 SP 5300DN M281 17 NA M281 27 EU M281 29 AP M281 21 CHN SP 5310DN M282 17 NA M282 27 EU M282 29 AP M282 21 CHN ...

Page 24: ... Paper Feed Unit PB1100 1 D3C2 01 NA EU AP D3C2 02 CH Yes Yes 2 Caster Table Type M24 D3C7 01 Yes Yes OCR Unit Type M13 D3AC 23 NA D3AC 24 EU D3AC 25 AP Yes No IPDS Unit Type M24 M500 02 NA M500 03 EU M500 04 AP CHN Yes Yes XPS Direct Print Option Type M24 D3CP 12 Yes Yes VM CARD Type P8 M500 09 NA M500 10 EU M500 11 AP CHN No Yes ...

Page 25: ...E 802 11 Interface Unit Type M24 M500 08 Yes Yes Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D D566 01 Yes No File Format Converter Type M19 D3BR 04 Yes No Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 D792 09 Yes Yes Hard Disk Drive Option Type P8 M500 05 No Yes NFC Card Reader Type M24 D3CP 08 Yes No DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type M19 D3BS 03 Yes No Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 B870 21 Yes No Fax Connect...

Page 26: ...PB1100 Caster Table Type M24 IPDS Unit Type M24 XPS Direct Print Option Type M24 VM CARD Type P8 USB Device Server Option Type M19 Extended USB Board Type M19 IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 IEEE 802 11 Interface Unit Type M24 Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D File Format Converter Type M19 Service installation is required for installing Paper Feed Unit PB1100 with Caster Table Type M24 depending...

Page 27: ...d New 2 3 08 12 2016 Added Important and Note in Installation Procedure 79 09 15 2016 Corrected After Installing HDD for Option Type M10 106 09 15 2016 Corrected After Installing HDD for Option Type P8 115 08 09 2016 Removed Notes for Energy Mode Setting ...

Page 28: ......

Page 29: ...idity 15 to 80 But humidity should be 70 or less when temperature is 90 5 F 32 5 C Adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality It is recommended to use the machine at a temperature around 59 to 77 F or less 15 to 25 C and humidity around 30 to 70 Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight A...

Page 30: ...he appropriate environment for copy work it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated 2 1 2 MACHINE LEVEL Front to back Within 5 mm 0 2 of level Right to left Within 5 mm 0 2 of level 2 1 3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS Place the machine near the power source and provide clearance as shown 1 Rear Over 300 mm 11 9 2 Right Over 200 mm 7 9 3 Front Over 500 mm 19 7 4 Left Over 300 mm 11 9 The 500...

Page 31: ...D256 M281 M282 Installation 2 1 4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS MP 501 601 W D H including ARDF and operation panel 475 504 645 mm 18 8 19 9 25 4 A 475 mm 18 8 B 645 mm 25 4 SP 5300 5310 W D H 420 410 345 mm 16 6 16 2 13 6 A 420 mm 16 6 B 345 mm 13 6 ...

Page 32: ...e and easily accessible Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet Avoid multi wiring Be sure to ground the machine Input voltage NA 120 to 127 V 6A 60 Hz 2 EU AP CHN 220 to 240 V 6A 50 Hz 2 60 Hz 2 For users in Norway this product is also designed for an IT power distribution system with phase to phase voltage of 230V ...

Page 33: ...ine at installation If you enter and exit SP mode during toner supply e g to skip the Program Change Administrator screen toner supply stops and Add toner indication may appear If Add toner indication appears open and close the Front Cover of the machine The toner supply will start 2 2 2 ACCESSORY CHECK MP 501 601 Check the quantity and condition of these accessories See IMPORTANT and NOTE below R...

Page 34: ...CD ROM OI 1 9 Manual Read This First 1 1 10 Sheet Quick Installation Guide 1 1 11 Manual Initial Guide for FAX 1 1 12 Guarantee sheet 1 13 Manual Start Guide 1 1 14 Caution Sheet Operation panel 1 1 1 15 Caution Sheet NFC tag 2 2 2 16 Sheet Security 1 1 1 17 Sheet EULA End User License Agreement 1 1 1 18 Seal Caution 1 1 1 19 Sheet Safety Information 1 20 Sheet User Registration 1 21 Sheet Help De...

Page 35: ... cord 1 1 1 1 4 Starter toner 1 1 1 1 5 CD ROM Drivers 1 1 1 1 6 CD ROM OI 1 7 Manual Read This First 1 1 1 1 8 Sheet Quick Installation Guide 1 2 1 1 9 Sheet Eco Night 1 1 1 1 10 Guarantee sheet 1 11 Sheet Control panel 1 1 1 12 Sheet Security 1 1 1 1 13 Guarantee sheet Chinese 1 14 Sheet User Registration 1 15 Sheet Help Desk Card 1 16 Sheet EULA End User License Agreement 1 1 1 1 17 Seal Cautio...

Page 36: ...e paper type as Middle Thick for the tray loaded with label paper User Tools Machine Features System Settings Tray Paper Settings Paper Type Tray Paper Thickness Middle Thick Instruct the user to select Middle Thick as paper type on the printer driver when printing on label paper SMC STORAGE The SMC report provided with the machine needs to be stored with the machine The factory SP settings are re...

Page 37: ...erview The following Program Change Administrator screen appears at the first power up When the customers sets the administrator supervisor login password the screen disappears and the home display appears The customer however can make this screen disappear with the following procedure if there is no need to set the password 1 On the Program Change Administrator screen press Change next to Supervi...

Page 38: ...ord Setting Procedure For more details about this security issue see Notes on Using Multi Function Printers Safely supplied with the MFP When Supervisor Administrator 1 4 passwords are configured via network the Change Supervisor login password window will not be displayed The passwords for Supervisor or Administrator 1 to 4 can be set via System Settings However the Program Change Administrator s...

Page 39: ...Main Machine Installation SM 2 11 D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation 4 Enter a password 5 Press OK 6 Confirm the password ...

Page 40: ...Main Machine Installation D255 D256 M281 M282 2 12 SM 7 Press OK 8 Change the Administrator 1 login password 9 Enter the password ...

Page 41: ...Main Machine Installation SM 2 13 D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation 10 Press OK 11 Confirm the password 12 Press OK 13 Turn OFF ON the main power ...

Page 42: ...0 disabled The counter cannot be displayed or printed by the customer To check the counter the service representative must print the SMC report SP 5 990 Item SP No Function Default Meter Click Charge SP5 930 001 Enables or disables Meter Click Charge When enabled The counter menu shows immediately after you push the Menu key In MP 501 601 Counter Method SP5 045 001 sets the type of the counter You...

Page 43: ...resentative 002 shows or sets the fax number of the service station This number is displayed on the error message screen when an SC occurs 2 2 7 MOVING THE MACHINE This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor See the section Transporting the Machine if you have to pack the machine and move it a longer distance Turn OFF the main power and pull out the powe...

Page 44: ...stallation D255 D256 M281 M282 2 16 SM 2 2 8 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE 1 Open the front cover MP 501 601 Push the button A and open the front cover B SP 5300 5310 Open the upper cover A and then open the front cover B ...

Page 45: ...owards you and then remove the toner cartridge B This prevents toner leakage caused by vibration during transport 3 Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays Then fix down the bottom plates with a sheet of paper and tape 4 If Caster Table Type M24 is installed remove the four stands A Front left side ...

Page 46: ...Machine Installation D255 D256 M281 M282 2 18 SM Rear right side 5 Lift the machine and then move it horizontally to the new location 6 If you have removed the stands for Caster Table Type M24 reattach them ...

Page 47: ...3 CASTER TABLE TYPE M24 D3C7 01 2 3 1 ACCESSORY CHECK No Description Q ty 1 Stands 4 2 Caster table 1 Manual Installation Guide 1 RoHS sheet 1 RoHS decal 1 The joint brackets and screws A for installation are stored in the accessory box B on the underside of the caster table ...

Page 48: ... items are stored in the accessory box No Description Q ty 1 Joint bracket A 2 2 Joint bracket B 1 3 Joint bracket C 4 4 Joint bracket D 4 5 Joint bracket E 4 6 Screws polished round spring M4 10 8 7 Hexagon flange screws M4 8 3 8 Tapping bind screws 3 8 4 9 Screws M3 6 8 ...

Page 49: ...er Table Type M24 with Paper Feed Unit PB1100 depending on the machine configuration Machine Configuration MP 501 601 SP 5300 5310 Printer only With 1 to 4 PFU PB1100 Printer only or with 1 PFU PB1100 With 2 to 4 PFU PB1100 Who can install the caster table End user Service representative 1 End user Service representative 1 1 The attaching stands and connecting parts need to be installed to prevent...

Page 50: ...Unit PB1100 D3C2 01 02 D255 D256 M281 M282 2 22 SM 2 4 PAPER FEED UNIT PB1100 D3C2 01 02 2 4 1 ACCESSORY CHECK No Description Q ty 1 Paper feed unit 1 Manual Installation Guide 1 EMC address decal NA EU AP only 1 ...

Page 51: ...ster table End user Service representative 1 End user Service representative 1 1 The attaching stands and connecting parts need to be installed to prevent the machine from falling over If it falls or topples over an injury might occur For instructions on installing Paper Feed Unit PB1100 and Caster Table Type M24 please refer to the procedure described in this section Installing the optional paper...

Page 52: ...2 D255 D256 M281 M282 2 24 SM 3 Turn over the caster table and then remove the accessory bracket A 4 Remove the package A which contains joints brackets and screws from the accessory bracket 5 Check the following items in the package ...

Page 53: ...ket B 1 3 Joint bracket C 4 4 Joint bracket D 4 5 Joint bracket E 4 6 Screws polished round spring M4 10 8 7 Hexagon flange screws M4 8 3 8 Tapping bind screws 3 8 4 9 Screws M3 6 8 6 Install the accessory bracket on the caster table Use the screws removed in Step 3 7 Install the optional paper feed unit A on the caster table B ...

Page 54: ... SM There are two upright pins A on the caster table Align them with the holes in the underside of the optional paper feed unit The hole A in the caster table indicates the front side of the caster table 8 Open the rear cover A of the optional paper feed unit ...

Page 55: ...0 D3C2 01 02 SM 2 27 D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation 9 Install the joint bracket A A on the rear side with the hexagon flange screw M4 8 10 Install the joint bracket A A on the rear side with the hexagon flange screw M4 8 ...

Page 56: ...paper feed tray A by pulling it out 13 Install the joint bracket B A on the front side with the hexagon flange screw M4 8 When you install two or more optional paper feed units please refer to page 2 29 When installing two or more optional paper feed units When you install only one optional paper feed unit please refer to page 2 32 ...

Page 57: ... the optional paper feed unit A on the lower paper feed unit B There are two upright pins A on the optional paper feed unit Align the upright pins of the lower paper feed unit with the holes in the underside of the upper paper feed unit Then carefully lower the upper paper feed unit 2 Open the rear cover A of the optional paper feed unit ...

Page 58: ...SM 3 Install the joint bracket E A on the rear right side to secure the optional paper feed unit and lower paper feed unit 4 Open the rear cover A of the lower paper feed unit and then secure the joint bracket installed in the previous step with the screw M3 6 ...

Page 59: ...joint bracket D A on the rear left side to secure the optional paper feed unit and lower paper feed unit 6 Open the rear cover A of the lower paper feed unit and then secure the joint bracket installed in the previous step with the screw M3 6 7 Remove the paper feed tray A by pulling it out ...

Page 60: ...the front side to secure the upper paper feed unit and lower paper feed unit with the tapping bind screw 3 8 9 If you install more optional paper feed units repeat Steps 1 to 8 Installing the main machine on the optional paper feed unit 1 Install the main machine A on the optional paper feed unit B ...

Page 61: ...D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation There are two upright pins A on the optional paper feed unit Align them with the holes in the underside of the main machine and then carefully lower the machine 2 Open the rear lower cover A of the main machine ...

Page 62: ...1 M282 2 34 SM 3 Install the joint bracket E A on the rear right side to secure the main machine and paper feed unit 4 Open the rear cover A of the paper feed unit and then secure the joint bracket installed in the previous step with the screw M3 6 ...

Page 63: ...e joint bracket D A on the rear left side to secure the main machine and paper feed unit 6 Open the rear cover A of the paper feed unit and then secure the joint bracket installed in the previous step with the screw M3 6 7 Remove the paper feed tray A of the main machine by pulling it out ...

Page 64: ...t bracket C A on the front side to secure the main machine and optional paper feed unit with the tapping bind screw 3 8 9 Put back the paper feed trays 10 Attach the two stands A provided with the caster table on the front and left sides with the screws polished round spring M4 10 ...

Page 65: ...aper Feed Unit PB1100 D3C2 01 02 SM 2 37 D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation 11 Attach the two stands A provided with the caster table on the rear and right sides with the screws polished round spring M4 10 ...

Page 66: ...70 21 MP 501 601 ONLY 2 5 1 ACCESSORY CHECK No Description Q ty 1 MKB board 1 2 Tapping screw M3x6 4 3 Harness band 1 4 Stud 4 5 Harness clamp LWS 0711 1 6 Harness 1 EMC address decal 1 2 5 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Turn OFF the main power and unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Open the rear upper cover A ...

Page 67: ... 39 D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation 2 Insert a flathead screwdriver into A to release the hook on the inside of the controller cover B 3 Release the hook by opening the right side of the cover and then remove the cover A by rotating it in the direction of the blue arrow ...

Page 68: ...the inside of the controller cover when you remove or install the controller cover 4 Insert a flathead screwdriver in the order of and to release the three hooks of the rear left stay A 5 Remove the rear left stay A Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear left stay when you remove or install the rear left stay ...

Page 69: ...y SM 2 41 D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation 6 Push the button A and open the front cover B 7 Release the hook A of the right upper cover B by opening the cover in the direction of the arrow 8 Remove the right upper cover A by inserting a flathead screwdriver into B ...

Page 70: ...B870 21 MP 501 601 Only D255 D256 M281 M282 2 42 SM Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the right upper cover when you remove or install the right upper cover 9 Remove the bracket A 10 Install the four stud stays as shown below ...

Page 71: ...282 Installation 11 Install the optional counter interface board A on the four stud stays 12 Connect the harness 13 pins to CN3 A on the optional counter interface board and CN112 B on the BiCU 13 Fasten the harness with the clamp A 14 Bind the harness with the harness bind B as shown below ...

Page 72: ... Connect the harness from the optional counter device to CN4 A on the optional counter interface board 16 Remove the knockout A of the rear left stay B with a pair of nippers Then pass the harness which is connected to the optional counter interface in the previous step 17 Reassemble the machine ...

Page 73: ... 2 6 NFC CARD READER TYPE M24 D3CP 08 MP 501 601 ONLY 2 6 1 ACCESSORY CHECK No Description Q ty 1 NFC card reader 1 2 Upper cover 1 3 Base cover 1 4 Hoop and loop fastener 1 5 USB cable 1 6 Ferrite core 1 7 FG clamp 1 8 Tapping screw 3 8 1 EMC address decal 1 Caution Sheet 1 Caution Chart 1 ...

Page 74: ...282 2 46 SM 2 6 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Turn OFF the main power and unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Open the rear upper cover A 2 Insert a flathead screwdriver into A to release the hook on the inside of the controller cover B ...

Page 75: ...M282 Installation 3 Release the hook by opening the right side of the cover and then remove the cover A by rotating it in the direction of the blue arrow Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the controller cover when you remove or install the controller cover ...

Page 76: ...1 M282 2 48 SM 4 Insert a flathead screwdriver in the order of and to release the three hooks of the rear left stay A 5 Remove the rear left stay A Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear left stay when you remove or install the rear left stay ...

Page 77: ...9 D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation 6 Push the button A and open the front cover B 7 Release the hook A of the right upper cover B by opening the cover in the direction of the arrow 8 Remove the right upper cover A by inserting a flathead screwdriver into B ...

Page 78: ...2 50 SM Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the right upper cover when you remove or install the right upper cover 9 Insert a flathead screwdriver at A to release the hook of the scanner front cover B 10 Release the two hooks of the scanner front cover A ...

Page 79: ...11 Insert a flathead screwdriver at A to release the hook and then remove the scanner front cover B Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the scanner front cover when you remove or install the scanner front cover 12 Release the two hooks of the operation panel arm upper cover A ...

Page 80: ...rewdriver into A to release the hook and then remove the operation panel arm upper cover B Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the operation panel arm upper cover when you remove or install the operation panel arm upper cover 14 Remove the hinge cover A from the operation panel hook 2 ...

Page 81: ... D256 M281 M282 Installation 15 Make a loop at the end of the USB cable A and then attach the ferrite core B as shown below Attach the ferrite core at a distance of 4 0 cm 1 6 inch A from the end of USB cable 16 Peel off the conductive tape A from the USB cable B ...

Page 82: ...08 MP 501 601 Only D255 D256 M281 M282 2 54 SM 17 Insert the USB cable A into the media slot of the operation panel Insert the end A of the USB cable where the ferrite core is not attached into the media slot of the operation panel ...

Page 83: ...24 D3CP 08 MP 501 601 Only SM 2 55 D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation 18 Route the USB cable A to the right side of the machine hook 2 19 Secure the USB cable A with the clamp 20 Remove the screw A from the operation panel arm ...

Page 84: ... MP 501 601 Only D255 D256 M281 M282 2 56 SM 21 Install the FG clamp A to the operation panel arm When installing the FG clamp bind the USB cable B with the FG clamp A Make sure to bind the part where the coating is stripped partially ...

Page 85: ... with NFC Card Reader Type M24 22 Attach the hook and loop fastener A to the base cover B at the position shown below 23 Peel off the mount from the hook and loop fastener and then attach the NFC card reader A to the base cover B at the position shown below Attach the NFC card reader with the USB port A of the NFC card reader set to face right ...

Page 86: ...M281 M282 2 58 SM 24 Peel off the mount A of the seal from the back side B of the base cover 25 Fit the notch part A of the base cover B into the right upper cover C of the main machine and then attach it 26 Reattach the right upper cover A to the main machine ...

Page 87: ...5 D256 M281 M282 Installation When attaching the right upper cover pull out the USB cable A through the notch B in the right upper cover 27 Connect the USB cable A to the NFC card reader B 28 Attach the upper cover A to the base cover B 29 Reassemble the machine ...

Page 88: ...URITY HDD OPTION TYPE M10 D792 09 2 7 1 ACCESSORY CHECK No Description Q ty 1 Enhanced security HDD 1 EMC address sheet 1 The following parts are separately required when installing Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 on SP 5300 5310 in which Hard Disk Drive Option Type P8 is not installed ...

Page 89: ...Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 D792 09 SM 2 61 D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation No Description Q ty 1 HDD bracket 1 2 Power source cable 1 3 Data cable 1 4 Stepped screw 4 5 Tapping screw 2 ...

Page 90: ...2 SM 2 7 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE MP 501 601 Turn OFF the main power and unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Open the rear upper cover A 2 Insert a flathead screwdriver into A to release the hook on the inside of the controller cover B ...

Page 91: ...82 Installation 3 Release the hook by opening the right side of the cover and then remove the cover A by rotating it in the direction of the blue arrow Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the controller cover when you remove or install the controller cover ...

Page 92: ...M282 2 64 SM 4 Insert a flathead screwdriver in the order of and to release the three hooks of the rear left stay A 5 Remove the rear left stay A Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear left stay when you remove or install the rear left stay ...

Page 93: ... D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation 6 Push the button A and open the front cover B 7 Release the hook A of the right upper cover B by opening the cover in the direction of the arrow 8 Remove the right upper cover A by inserting a flathead screwdriver into B ...

Page 94: ...2 09 D255 D256 M281 M282 2 66 SM Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the right upper cover when you remove or install the right upper cover 9 Remove the paper feed tray A by pulling it out 10 Remove the power connector cover A ...

Page 95: ...1 M282 Installation When removing the power connector cover pull it in the direction of the arrow Be careful not to damage the hook on the power connector cover when you remove or install the power connector cover 11 Remove the four screws from the right lower cover A ...

Page 96: ... M10 D792 09 D255 D256 M281 M282 2 68 SM 12 Close the rear upper cover A 13 Open the rear lower cover A and then release the hook of the right lower cover B by rotating it in the direction of the blue arrow 14 Release the hooks A and B ...

Page 97: ...nstallation 15 Remove the right lower cover A by rotating it in the direction of the arrow Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the right lower cover when you remove or install the right lower cover Do not remove the screw A when removing the right lower cover B ...

Page 98: ...anced Security HDD Option Type M10 D792 09 D255 D256 M281 M282 2 70 SM 16 Remove the bracket A 17 Disconnect the USB connector A of the operation panel 18 Disconnect the two flat cables and two connectors ...

Page 99: ...tion Make sure to open the flap before disconnecting the flat cable A as shown in the following pictures Otherwise the connector may be damaged When disconnecting the flat cable A pull it out in the direction of the arrow 19 Release the flat cable and harness from the harness guides ...

Page 100: ... M282 2 72 SM 20 Remove the seven screws from the controller box A The screw B is a tapping screw Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing the controller box 21 Release the hook A and then remove the controller box B by rotating it counter clockwise ...

Page 101: ...Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 D792 09 SM 2 73 D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation 22 Disconnect the connector on the controller box A 23 Remove the fax unit A 24 Remove the cap A ...

Page 102: ...Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 D792 09 D255 D256 M281 M282 2 74 SM 25 Remove the slot cover A 26 Remove the controller box cover A ...

Page 103: ...w B is a small screw Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing the controller box cover 27 Remove the controller board A with the BiCU B Be careful not to damage the backside of the controller board A and the BiCU B 28 Remove the HDD with the bracket A from the controller box B hook 2 ...

Page 104: ...curity HDD Option Type M10 D792 09 D255 D256 M281 M282 2 76 SM 29 Remove the HDD A from the HDD bracket B 30 Disconnect the two cables A from the HDD B 31 Remove the enhanced security HDD from its protective pack ...

Page 105: ...M281 M282 Installation 32 Connect the two cables A to the enhanced security HDD B 33 Install the enhanced security HDD A on the HDD bracket B When installing the enhanced security HDD on the bracket make sure to pass the cables through the hole A of the HDD bracket ...

Page 106: ...e controller box B hook 2 35 Reassemble the machine When reattaching the controller box A make sure to secure the harness and flat cable to the harness guides as shown below When reattaching the bracket A of the controller box B do not interpose the harness and the flat cable between the bracket and the controller box ...

Page 107: ...atting the hard disk Do not touch the power switch while the hard disk format is in progress Wait for the machine to tell you that the formatting is finished 4 Turn the main power OFF ON after a message tells you formatting is finished 5 Enter the SP mode 6 Execute SP5 853 001 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the hard disk Follow the instructions on the screen This will require t...

Page 108: ...ower and unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Open the upper cover A 2 Remove the two screws from the upper cover A The screw B is a sems screw The screw C is a tapping screw Be careful not use the wrong screws when installing the upper cover 3 Remove the screw from the rear side of the upper cover A ...

Page 109: ... D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation 4 Lift the upper cover A by releasing the two hooks and then put it on the mainframe so that you can access the bracket B on the right side of the machine 5 Remove the bracket A 6 Disconnect the flat cable from the BiCU A ...

Page 110: ...re disconnecting the flat cable A as shown in the following pictures Otherwise the connector may be damaged 7 Remove the plastic sheet A from the mainframe hook 2 and then remove the upper cover B Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the upper cover when you remove or install the upper cover ...

Page 111: ...Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 D792 09 SM 2 83 D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation 8 Remove the paper feed tray A by pulling it out 9 Open the front cover A 10 Remove the power connector cover A ...

Page 112: ...in the direction of the arrow Be careful not to damage the hook on the power connector cover when you remove or install the power connector cover 11 Remove the five screws from the right cover A The screw B is a tapping screw The screw C is a long screw Be careful not to use the wrong screws when installing the right cover ...

Page 113: ...5 D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation 12 Close the rear upper cover A 13 Open the rear lower cover A and then release the hook of the right cover B by rotating it in the direction of the blue arrow 14 Release the four hooks and then remove the right cover A ...

Page 114: ...ty HDD Option Type M10 D792 09 D255 D256 M281 M282 2 86 SM Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the right cover when you remove or install the right cover 15 Disconnect the flat cable and two connectors ...

Page 115: ...isconnecting the flat cable A as shown in the following pictures Otherwise the connector may be damaged 16 Release the flat cable and harness from the harness guides 17 Remove the seven screws from the controller box A The screw B is a tapping screw Be careful not to use the wrong screws when installing the controller box ...

Page 116: ...hanced Security HDD Option Type M10 D792 09 D255 D256 M281 M282 2 88 SM 18 Release the hook A and then remove the controller box B 19 Remove the cap A from the controller box B 20 Remove the slot cover A ...

Page 117: ...er box cover A The screw B is a small screw Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing the controller box cover 22 Remove the controller board A with the BiCU B Be careful not to damage the backside of the controller board A and the BiCU B 23 Remove the enhanced security HDD from its protective pack ...

Page 118: ...ct the power source cable A and data cable B to the enhanced security HDD C 25 Install the enhanced security HDD A on the HDD bracket B with the stepped screws When installing the enhanced security HDD on the bracket make sure to pass the cables through the hole A of the HDD bracket ...

Page 119: ...ontroller box B with the tapping screws hook 2 27 Reassemble the machine When reattaching the controller board A with the BiCU B on the controller box C connect the two cables of the HDD to the controller board A When reattaching the controller box A make sure to secure the harness and flat cable to the harness guides as shown below ...

Page 120: ...g Hard Disk Please wait also make sure the main power switch is not turned off is displayed 3 Wait for the machine to finish formatting the hard disk Do not touch the power switch while the hard disk format is in progress Wait for the machine to tell you that the formatting is finished When the formatting is finished the message Hard Disk is formatted Turn main power switch off then on is displaye...

Page 121: ...SP 5300 5310 Only SM 2 93 D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation 2 8 HARD DISK DRIVE OPTION TYPE P8 M500 05 SP 5300 5310 ONLY 2 8 1 ACCESSORY CHECK No Description Q ty 1 HDD 1 2 Power source cable 1 3 Data cable 1 4 Tapping screw round point 3 6 2 ...

Page 122: ...ed two or more persons to lift the main machine The main machine is highly unstable when it is lifted by one person and may cause injury or property damage Be sure to hold the specified positions when lifting the machine 1 Open the upper cover A 2 Remove the two screws from the upper cover A The screw B is a sems screw The screw C is a tapping screw Be careful not use the wrong screws when install...

Page 123: ...255 D256 M281 M282 Installation 3 Remove the screw from the rear side of the upper cover A 4 Lift the upper cover A by releasing the two hooks and then put it on the mainframe so that you can access the bracket B on the right side of the machine 5 Remove the bracket A ...

Page 124: ...2 96 SM 6 Disconnect the flat cable from the BiCU A Make sure to open the flap before disconnecting the flat cable A as shown in the following pictures Otherwise the connector may be damaged 7 Remove the plastic sheet A from the mainframe hook 2 and then remove the upper cover B ...

Page 125: ...P 5300 5310 Only SM 2 97 D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the upper cover when you remove or install the upper cover 8 Remove the paper feed tray A by pulling it out 9 Open the front cover A ...

Page 126: ...D255 D256 M281 M282 2 98 SM 10 Remove the power connector cover A When removing the power connector cover pull it in the direction of the arrow Be careful not to damage the hook on the power connector cover when you remove or install the power connector cover ...

Page 127: ...nly SM 2 99 D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation 11 Remove the five screws from the right cover A The screw B is a tapping screw The screw C is a long screw Be careful not to use the wrong screws when installing the right cover 12 Close the rear upper cover A ...

Page 128: ...05 SP 5300 5310 Only D255 D256 M281 M282 2 100 SM 13 Open the rear lower cover A and then release the hook of the right cover B by rotating it in the direction of the blue arrow 14 Release the four hooks and then remove the right cover A ...

Page 129: ...P8 M500 05 SP 5300 5310 Only SM 2 101 D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the right cover when you remove or install the right cover 15 Disconnect the flat cable and two connectors ...

Page 130: ...81 M282 2 102 SM Make sure to open the flap before disconnecting the flat cable A as shown in the following pictures Otherwise the connector may be damaged 16 Release the flat cable and harness from the harness guides 17 Remove the seven screws from the controller box A ...

Page 131: ...255 D256 M281 M282 Installation The screw B is a tapping screw Be careful not to use the wrong screws when installing the controller box 18 Release the hook A and then remove the controller box B 19 Remove the cap A from the controller box B 20 Remove the slot cover A ...

Page 132: ... controller box cover A The screw B is a small screw Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing the controller box cover 22 Remove the controller board A with the BiCU B Be careful not to damage the backside of the controller board A and the BiCU B 23 Connect the two cables A to the HDD B ...

Page 133: ... sure to pass the cables through the hole A of the HDD bracket 24 Install the HDD A on the controller box B with the tapping screws hook 2 25 Reassemble the machine When reattaching the controller board A with the BiCU B on the controller box C connect the two cables of the HDD to the controller board A ...

Page 134: ...ain power The message Hard Disk is replaced Format Hard Disk is displayed 2 Select Format The message Formatting Hard Disk Please wait also make sure the main power switch is not turned off is displayed 3 Wait for the machine to finish formatting the hard disk Do not touch the power switch while the hard disk format is in progress Wait for the machine to tell you that the formatting is finished Wh...

Page 135: ...tion A I F slot USB Device Server Option Type M19 IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 IEEE 802 11 Interface Unit Type M24 Extended USB Board Type M19 File Format Converter Type M19 2 B USB ports 1 Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D 2 1 There is no difference between the left and right USB ports 2 MP 501 601 only ...

Page 136: ...escription Q ty 1 IEEE 1284 interface board 1 EMC address sheet 1 FCC sheet 1 RoHS sheet 1 RoHS decal 1 2 10 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 is installed by the end user For instructions on installing please refer to the operating instructions About This Machine for MP 501 601 or Operating Instructions for SP 5300 5310 ...

Page 137: ...M500 08 2 11 1 ACCESSORY CHECK No Description Q ty 1 IEEE 802 11 interface board 1 2 11 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IEEE 802 11 Interface Unit Type M24 is installed by the end user For instructions on installing please refer to the operating instructions About This Machine for MP 501 601 or Operating Instructions for SP 5300 5310 ...

Page 138: ...Y 2 12 1 ACCESSORY CHECK No Description Q ty 1 Bluetooth interface unit 1 EMC address sheet 1 CD ROM 1 Caution sheet 1 Caution chart 1 FCC sheet 1 FCC DOC sheet 1 2 12 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D is installed by the end user For instructions on installing please refer to the operating instructions About This Machine ...

Page 139: ...M19 D3BC 28 29 SM 2 111 D255 D256 M281 M282 Installation 2 13 USB DEVICE SERVER OPTION TYPE M19 D3BC 28 29 2 13 1 ACCESSORY CHECK No Description Q ty 1 USB cable 1 2 Interface board 1 3 Ferrite core 2 4 Cable ties 2 Interface Board ...

Page 140: ...e this port with other options 2 13 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE When you install this option to the main machine for the first time the interface board must be connected directly to your PC to set up the IP address and other network settings Turn OFF the main power and unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover A from the re...

Page 141: ... Installation 3 Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board 4 Using the supplied USB cable A connect the USB device server to the machine 5 Mount the ferrite cores on the Ethernet cable while looping the cable at 3 cm approx 1 2 inch A from the each end of the cable ...

Page 142: ...t board on this option 8 Insert the other end of the Ethernet cable to a PC for network setting 9 Plug the power cord into the wall socket and turn ON the main power Do not unplug the USB connector while the machine is recognizing this option It may take between 30 seconds to 1 minute to finish recognizing it the LEDs by the connector light up when finished see below If unplugged connect the cable...

Page 143: ...o the LED Indicators Mean When this option is properly installed and recognized by the main machine the LED indicators light up under the following conditions No LED Color Lights Up When 1 Green and Yellow 1000BASE T operates 2 Green 10BASE T operates 3 Yellow 100BASE TX operates Rev 08 09 2016 ...

Page 144: ... setting must be done from a web browser on your PC The network setting of this option is initially assigned as follows IP address 192 168 100 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 The network setting of your PC must be in the same network segment in order to change the network setting of this option 1 Make a note of the current network settings of your PC 2 Change the IP address on your PC to 192 168 100...

Page 145: ...onnect the Ethernet cable to a network device for example switching hub 15 Set the IP address of this option in the printer driver that you are using Check All Connections 1 Plug in the power cord Turn ON the main power 2 Print the configuration page MP 501 601 1 Press the User Tools icon on the operation panel 2 Press Machine Features 3 Press List Test Print in Printer Features 4 Press Configurat...

Page 146: ...01 ONLY 2 14 1 ACCESSORY CHECK No Description Q ty 1 File Format Converter MLB Media Link Board 1 EMC address sheet 1 FCC sheet 1 RoHS decal 1 RoHS label 1 2 14 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE File Format Converter Type M19 is installed by the end user For instructions on installing please refer to the operating instructions About This Machine ...

Page 147: ...scription Q ty 1 Extended USB board 1 Connector cap 1 EMC address sheet 1 FCC sheet 1 RoHS decal 1 RoHS label 1 2 15 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Extended USB Board Type M19 is installed by the end user For instructions on installing please refer to the operating instructions About This Machine for MP 501 601 or Operating Instructions for SP 5300 5310 ...

Page 148: ...1 IPDS Unit Type M24 XPS Direct Print Option Type M24 VM Card Type P8 2 Fax Connection Unit Type M24 1 B SD Card Slot 2 service slot Use for service only for example updating the firmware 1 MP 501 601 only 2 SP 5300 5310 only Optional SD cards can be set in either Slot 1 or Slot 2 However Slot 2 is the service slot so it is recommended that Slot 1 to be used to install the SD card options ...

Page 149: ...tion fails if you try to use the SD card after you copy the application program from one card to another card Do not use the SD card if it has been used before for other purposes Normal operation is not guaranteed when such an SD card is used Keep the SD card in a safe place after you copy the application program from one card to another card This is for the following reasons 1 The SD card can be ...

Page 150: ...FF the main power 9 Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 10 Turn ON the main power 11 Check that the application programs run normally 2 17 4 UNDO EXEC The menu Undo Exec SP5 873 002 lets you copy back application programs from an SD card to the original SD card You can use this program when for example you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec SP5 873 001 Do not turn ON the wr...

Page 151: ...82 Installation 8 Turn OFF the main power 9 Remove the SD card from SD card slot 2 This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the machine 10 Turn ON the main power 11 Check that the application programs run normally ...

Page 152: ... 2 18 OCR UNIT TYPE M13 D3AC 23 24 25 MP 501 601 ONLY 2 18 1 ACCESSORY CHECK No Description Q ty 1 OCR unit SD card 1 Caution sheet EU only 1 RoHS sheet AP CHN only 1 RoHS decal AP CHN only 1 2 18 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 Turn OFF the main power 2 Open the rear upper cover A ...

Page 153: ... D256 M281 M282 Installation 3 Insert a flathead screwdriver into A to release the hook on the inside of the controller cover B 4 Release the hook by opening the right side of the cover and then remove the cover A by rotating it in the direction of the blue arrow ...

Page 154: ...SP5 878 004 Option Setup OCR Dictionary The SD card ID is saved in the NVRAM and the ID of the MFP is saved on the SD card The MFP and SD card are thereby linked 8 When operation complete is displayed press Close If installation fails Failed is displayed If installation fails perform the following steps 1 Check whether it is a used SD card 2 Turn OFF the main power and repeat steps 1 5 9 Turn OFF ...

Page 155: ...rom the SD card slot Keep the SD card in a safe place The original SD card is needed in the event of a HDD malfunction 12 Reattach the controller cover 13 Turn ON the main power 14 Press Send File Type Name on the scanner screen 15 Check if OCR Settings is displayed on the Send File Type Name screen After installation the OCR setting can be changed on the OCR setting screen When setting OCR set OC...

Page 156: ... original SD card When only the HDD is replaced Reinstall using the original SD card When only the NVRAM is replaced When uploading or downloading the NVRAM data reinstall using the original SD card When not uploading or downloading the NVRAM data order and reinstall a new SD card service part When the HDD and NVRAM are replaced simultaneously Reinstall using the original SD card If the original S...

Page 157: ...E M24 D3CP 12 2 19 1 ACCESSORY CHECK No Description Q ty 1 XPS Direct Print SD card 1 EMC address sheet 1 RoHS sheet 1 RoHS decal 1 2 19 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE XPS Direct Print Option Type M24 is installed by the end user For instructions on installing please refer to the operating instructions About This Machine ...

Page 158: ...Emulation SD card 1 Decal 1 EULA sheet NA only 1 Caution sheet 1 CD ROM 1 RoHS sheet AP CHN only 1 RoHS decal AP CHN only 1 2 20 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE IPDS Unit Type M24 is installed by the end user For instructions on installing please refer to the operating instructions About This Machine for MP 501 601 or Operating Instructions for SP 5300 5310 ...

Page 159: ... CARD TYPE P8 M500 09 10 11 SP 5300 5310 ONLY 2 21 1 ACCESSORY CHECK No Description Q ty 1 VM SD card 1 Caution sheet EU only 1 2 21 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE VM CARD Type P8 is installed by the end user For instructions on installing please refer to the operating instructions Operating Instructions ...

Page 160: ...can overwrite all data stored on the hard disk Erase All Memory You can also automatically overwrite temporarily stored data Auto Erase Memory The function of this option is exactly the same as the Data Overwrite Security in Security Functions which is standard on this machine page 2 141 Data Overwrite Security MP 501 601 This option should be installed only for the customer who requires the CC ce...

Page 161: ...at their factory default values tell the customer that these settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure 3 Make sure that Admin Authentication is ON User Tools Machine Features System Settings Administrator Tools Administrator Authentication Management Admin Authentication If this setting is OFF tell the customer that this setting must be ON before you do the installation pro...

Page 162: ... must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after the items were sealed in the box at the factory before you do the installation 1 Check the box seals A on each corner of the box Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner The surfaces of the tapes must be blank If you see VOID on the tapes do not install the components in the box 2 If the surfaces of the tapes do not sh...

Page 163: ... D256 M281 M282 Installation 2 22 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 Turn OFF the main power and then remove the power plug and cables that are connected 2 Open the rear upper cover A 3 Insert a flathead screwdriver into A to release the hook on the inside of the controller cover B ...

Page 164: ...ng the right side of the cover and then remove the cover A by rotating it in the direction of the blue arrow Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the controller cover when you remove or install the controller cover 5 Insert the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type M19 SD card in SD Card Slot 1 A upper slot ...

Page 165: ... one execute SP5 801 014 only If the customer continues using the same hard disk the overwriting of the data stored on the disk before the option is installed cannot be guaranteed It is highly recommended to replace the hard disk with a new one 10 Set SP5 836 001 Capture Function 0 Off 1 On to a value of 0 Disable 11 Execute SP5 878 001 Option Setup Data Overwrite Security If the installation fail...

Page 166: ...ext twice 6 Press Auto Erase Memory Setting 7 Press On 8 Select the method of overwriting If you select NSA or DoD proceed to Step 11 If you select Random Numbers proceed to Step 9 9 Press Change 10 Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the ten keys and then press The Random Numbers method overwrites the data using random numbers You can set the overwrite to be performed anywh...

Page 167: ...icon does not change to Clear check to see if there are any active Sample Print or Locked Print jobs A Sample Print or Locked Print job can only be overwritten after it has been executed The Dirty icon blinks while the overwrite is in progress If you use your machine for a while with Auto Erase Memory disabled and then suddenly enable it the overwrite process may take 10 or more hours depending on...

Page 168: ...owing on the operation panel MP 501 601 User Tools Machine Features System Settings Administrator Tools Machine Data Encryption Settings Encrypt All Data SP 5300 5310 Security Options Machine Data Encryption Encrypt Carry Over All Data Selecting the setting above will preserve the data that has already been saved to the HDD If Format All Data is selected all user data saved to the HDD up to that p...

Page 169: ...Supervisor login password 2 Administrator login name 3 Administrator login password If any of these settings are at their factory default values tell the customer that these settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure 2 Make sure that Admin Authentication is on User Tools Machine Features System Settings Administrator Tools Administrator Authentication Management Admin Authen...

Page 170: ...l 2 Press System Settings 3 Press Administrator Tools 4 Press Next three twice 5 Press Auto Erase Memory Setting 6 Press On 7 Select the method of overwriting If you select NSA or DoD proceed to step 10 If you select Random Numbers proceed to step 8 8 Press Change 9 Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the number keys and then press 10 Press OK Auto Erase Memory is set 11 Log...

Page 171: ...ry data to be overwritten 2 23 3 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY SP 5300 5310 Before You Begin the Procedure 1 Make sure that the following settings 1 to 3 are not at their factory default values 1 Supervisor login password 2 Administrator login name 3 Administrator login password If any of these settings are at their factory default values tell the customer that these settings must be changed before you ...

Page 172: ...ocedure 1 Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel 2 Select Security Options Press OK 3 Select Auto Erase Memory Setting Press OK 4 Select On Select HDDErase 5 Select the method of erasing the data from NSA DoD or Random Numbers Press OK If you select Random Numbers enter the number of times that you want to overwrite Then press OK 6 Press OK 7 Press Menu 8 Log out Checking the A...

Page 173: ...he installation procedure 2 Make sure that Admin Authentication is on User Tools Machine Features System Settings Administrator Tools Administrator Authentication Management Admin Authentication If this setting is off tell the customer that this setting must be on before you do the installation procedure 3 Make sure that Administrator Tools is enabled selected User Tools Machine Features System Se...

Page 174: ...bled after installing the new NVRAMs If the controller board is replaced the restore key will be required after installing the new controller board If you have the restore key you will be able to continue using the HDD data If the restore key has been lost the HDD will be formatted and you need to reset NVRAM data to the default settings after the forced start up HDD data will be deleted Refer to ...

Page 175: ...ol panel and press OK to back up the machine s data encryption key If you have selected Print on Paper press the Start key Print out the machine s data encryption key 10 Press OK 11 Press Exit 12 Press Exit 13 Log out 14 Turn OFF the main power and then turn the main power back on The machine will start to convert the data on the memory after you turn ON the main power Wait until the message Memor...

Page 176: ...for retrieving backup data 1 Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel 2 Press System Settings 3 Press Administrator Tools 4 Press Next three times 5 Press Machine Data Encryption Settings 6 Press Back Up Encryption Key 7 Select the backup method If you have selected Save to SD Card load an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel and press OK When the machine ...

Page 177: ...er the encryption key The key has already been printed out by the user and may have been saved in the key_xxxxxxxxxxx txt file The function of back up the encryption key to the SD card directly is provided 11A products or later 5 Turn ON the main power 6 Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that contains the encryption key 7 Turn OFF the main power 8 Insert ...

Page 178: ...ne automatically clear the HDD encryption 9 Turn OFF the main power when the machine has returned to normal status 10 Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 11 Turn ON the main power 12 Execute SP5 801 xx Exclude SP5 801 001 All Clear and SP5 801 002 Engine to resets NVRAM data to the default settings 13 Execute SP5 846 046 to clear the address book information 14 Set necessary user settings from ...

Page 179: ...lling the new NVRAMs If the controller board is replaced the restore key will be required after installing the new controller board If you have the restore key you will be able to continue using the HDD data If the restore key has been lost the HDD will be formatted and you need to reset NVRAM data to the default settings after the forced start up HDD data will be deleted Refer to How to do a forc...

Page 180: ... Options Press OK 3 Select Machine Data Encryption Press OK 4 Select Back Up Encryption Key Press OK 5 Select PrtOnPpr Print 6 Press Menu 7 Log out Encryption Key Restoration How to restore the old encryption key to the machine The following message appears after the controller board is replaced In such a case it is necessary to restore the encryption key to the new controller board To do this fol...

Page 181: ...controller board 10 Turn OFF the main power when the machine has returned to normal status 11 Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 How to do a forced start up with no encryption key If the encryption key back up has been lost follow the procedure below to do a forced start up The HDD will be formatted after the forced start up Encrypted data will be deleted User settings will be cleared 1 Prepar...

Page 182: ...t 7 Turn ON the main power 8 Turn ON the main power the machine automatically clear the HDD encryption 9 Turn OFF the main power when the machine has returned to normal status 10 Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 11 Turn ON the main power 12 Execute SP5 801 xx Exclude SP5 801 001 All Clear and SP5 801 002 Engine to resets NVRAM data to the default settings 13 Execute SP5 846 046 to clear the ...

Page 183: ...123456789 3 The following settings must be correctly programmed Proxy server IP address SP5 816 063 Proxy server Port number SP5 816 064 Proxy User ID SP5 816 065 Proxy Password SP5 816 066 4 Get a request number Execute the Remote Settings 1 Enter the SP mode 2 Input the request number which you have obtained from Remote Center GUI with SP5 816 202 3 Confirm the request number and then press EXEC...

Page 184: ... occur only in the modems that support Remote 21 Answer tone detection error 22 Carrier detection error 23 Invalid setting value modem 24 Low power supply current 25 unplugged modem 26 Busy line 5 Make sure that the screen displays the location information with SP5 816 205 only when it has been input at the Center GUI 6 Press EXECUTE to execute the registration with SP5 816 206 7 Check the registr...

Page 185: ... network condition 5 Proxy error Authentication error Check Proxy user name and password 8 Other error See SP5 816 208 Error Codes below 9 Request number confirmation executing Processing Please wait 11 Already registered 12 Parameter error 20 Dial up authentication error These errors occur only in the modems that support Remote 21 Answer tone detection error 22 Carrier detection error 23 Invalid ...

Page 186: ...inframe 12005 Remote communication is prohibited The device has an Embedded RC gate related problem Make sure that Remote Service in User Tools is set to Do not prohibit 12006 A confirmation request was made after the confirmation had been already completed Execute registration 12007 The request number used at registration was different from the one used at confirmation Check Request No 12008 Upda...

Page 187: ...rvice 2390 Program out of service 2391 Two registrations for the same mainframe Check the registration condition of the mainframe 2392 Parameter error 2393 External RCG not managed 2394 Mainframe not managed 2395 Box ID for external RCG is illegal 2396 Mainframe ID for external RCG is illegal 2397 Incorrect ID2 format Check the ID2 of the mainframe 2398 Incorrect request number format Check the re...

Page 188: ...es to keep in mind whenever moving the machine Product limitations Copier MP 501 601 Only Basic Copier operations How to load an original in the ARDF or place it on the exposure glass for scanning How to use thick paper and other specialized paper media How to configure the Copier main screen duplex simplex User Codes etc Basic Document Server operations Fax MP 501 601 Only How to send a fax Memor...

Page 189: ...PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 190: ......

Page 191: ...zed not as PM parts but as yield parts EM parts 1 Enter the SP mode 2 Output the SMC logging data with SP5 990 004 3 Set SP7 804 002 to 1 Item SP Drum unit Development unit Fusing unit Transfer unit Paper feed roller Pickup roller Separation roller Feed roller assy ARDF 1 Separation pad ARDF 1 SP7 804 002 1 Only for MP 501 601 4 Exit the SP mode 5 Turn OFF the main power 6 Replace the yield parts ...

Page 192: ...Yield Parts Settings D255 D256 M281 M282 3 2 SM Operation check Check if the sample image has been copied normally ...

Page 193: ...e Added Updated New 79 09 15 2016 Added After Replacement of Development Unit 102 08 09 2016 Added Fusing Unit note for replacement procedure 149 150 02 09 2017 Updated Replacing the NVRAM EEPROM on the IOB 154 155 09 15 2016 Added PSU Caution statement ...

Page 194: ......

Page 195: ...power cord before turning OFF the main power LED some icons on the operation panel will not appear at the next start up Restarting the machine again will solve this issue When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet inside the machine there is still residual charge When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet there is still residual charge inside the machine for a while...

Page 196: ...e machine 2 The shutdown message appears After the shutdown process the main power is turned OFF automatically The main power LED on the operation panel is turned OFF when the machine completes the shutdown Before removing and adjusting electrical boards do the following procedure Otherwise the board can be damaged by the residual charge inside the machine and must be replaced 3 Disconnect the pow...

Page 197: ...the power cord and network cable For MP 501 and MP 601 disconnect the telephone line Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before you handle SD cards printed circuit boards or memory boards Before you start to remove components from the machine do the following 1 Turn OFF the main power 2 Make sure that the shutdown process has finished and that the LED on...

Page 198: ...e for this machine C Common with listed machine No Part Number Description Q ty Unique or Common 1 B6455030 SD Card 2GB 1 C General 2 B6455040 SD Card 8GB 1 C General 3 B6455060 SD Card 16GB 1 C General A PC is required for creating the Encryption key file on an SD card when replacing the controller board for a model in which HDD encryption has been enabled ...

Page 199: ...again after completing these printing adjustments Registration Leading Edge Side to Side A Leading Edge Registration 4 2 5 mm B Side to side Registration 4 2 5 mm 1 Check the leading edge registration A for each paper feed station and adjust them using SP1 001 Paper Feed Station SP No Adjustment Range Tray 1 Main unit SP1 001 001 4 2 5 mm Tray 2 Optional tray SP1 001 002 Tray 3 Optional tray SP1 0...

Page 200: ...4 Optional tray SP1 002 004 Tray 5 Optional tray SP1 002 005 Bypass Tray SP1 002 006 Duplex Tray SP1 002 007 Blank Margin If the leading edge side to side registration cannot be adjusted within the specifications adjust the leading left side edge blank margin A Left Edge Blank Margin B Right Edge Blank Margin C Leading Edge Blank Margin D Trailing Edge Blank Margin 1 Check the trailing edge A righ...

Page 201: ...4 2 5 mm Right Edge SP2 103 002 Leading Edge SP2 103 003 Trailing Edge SP2 103 004 Main Scan Magnification 1 Use SP2 109 003 No 5 Grid Pattern to print the single dot grid pattern 2 Check the magnification and adjust the magnification using SP2 102 001 Magnification Adjustment Main Scan if necessary The specification is 1 ...

Page 202: ...de to side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment Registration Platen Mode A Side to side Registration Main Scan Reg 1 Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check the side to side registration and adjust it using the following SP mode if necessary SP No SP Name Adjustment Range SP4 011 001 Main Scan Reg 2 5 mm ...

Page 203: ...to side Registration 1 Place the temporary test chart on the ARDF and make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check the registration and adjust them using the following SP modes if necessary SP No SP Name Adjustment Range SP6 006 001 ADF Adjustment Side to Side Regist Front 3 0 mm SP6 006 002 ADF Adjustment Side to Side Regist Rear ...

Page 204: ...Reistration Correct Duplex 0 0 mm mm 1 SP1 002 001 Reistration Correct Main 0 0 mm mm 1 SP1 002 006 Reistration Correct By Pass Tray 0 0 mm mm 1 SP1 002 007 Reistration Correct Duplex 0 0 mm mm 1 SP4 011 001 S to S Regist Adjustment 0 0 mm mm 1 SP4 108 001 Sub Scan Speed Adjustment 0 0 1 SP4 110 001 L Edge Timing Adjustment 0 pulse pulse 1 SP4 609 001 Gray Balance Set R Book Scan 100 digit digit 1...

Page 205: ...ff AP 1 ON SP5 875 001 SC Auto Reboot Reboot Setting 0 The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error code 1 The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs SP5 907 001 Plug Play Maker Model Name 0 0 or 9 Set the appropriate setting for the model SP5 985 001 Device Setting On Board NIC 0 Disable 1 Enable SP5 985 002 Device Setting On Board USB 0 Dis...

Page 206: ...stration Correct Main 0 0 mm mm 1 SP1 001 006 Reistration Correct By Pass Tray 0 0 mm mm 1 SP1 001 007 Reistration Correct Duplex 0 0 mm mm 1 SP1 002 001 Reistration Correct Main 0 0 mm mm 1 SP1 002 006 Reistration Correct By Pass Tray 0 0 mm mm 1 SP1 002 007 Reistration Correct Duplex 0 0 mm mm 1 SP5 101 107 Auto Logout Timer Auto Logout Time 1 Enable 0 Disable SP5 305 101 Auto Off Set Set Functi...

Page 207: ... and Adjustment SP No SP Name Default Value Factory Setting SP5 805 002 Drum Heater NA EU 0 Off AP 1 ON NA EU 0 Off AP 1 ON SP5 907 001 Plug Play Maker Model Name 0 0 or 9 Set the appropriate setting for the model 1 This setting is specific to the machine type ...

Page 208: ... MP 501 601 4 6 1 SCANNER FRONT COVER 1 Insert a flathead screwdriver at A to release the hook of the scanner front cover B 2 Release the two hooks of the scanner front cover A 3 Insert a flathead screwdriver at A to release the hook and then remove the scanner front cover B ...

Page 209: ... M282 Replacement and Adjustment Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the scanner front cover when you remove or install the scanner front cover 4 6 2 FRONT COVER 1 Remove the paper feed tray A by pulling it out 2 Open the bypass tray A ...

Page 210: ...1 601 D255 D256 M281 M282 4 16 SM 3 Release the left hinge A of the bypass tray with a flathead screwdriver by slightly bending the bypass tray inward 4 Release the right hinge A of the bypass tray by sliding it to the left ...

Page 211: ...Exterior Covers MP 501 601 SM 4 17 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 5 Remove the right connecting arm A and left connecting arm B of the bypass tray C 6 Remove the bypass tray C ...

Page 212: ...Exterior Covers MP 501 601 D255 D256 M281 M282 4 18 SM 7 Push the button A and open the front cover B 8 Remove the switch cover A ...

Page 213: ...Exterior Covers MP 501 601 SM 4 19 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 9 Remove the spring A and power switch B 10 Remove the belt A 11 Remove the front cover A by releasing the left hinge B ...

Page 214: ...5 D256 M281 M282 4 20 SM 4 6 3 RIGHT UPPER COVER 1 Remove the rear left stay page 4 37 2 Push the button A and open the front cover B 3 Release the hook A of the right upper cover B by opening the cover in the direction of the arrow ...

Page 215: ... D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 4 Remove the right upper cover A by inserting a flathead screwdriver into B Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the right upper cover when you remove or install the right upper cover ...

Page 216: ... M282 4 22 SM 4 6 4 RIGHT LOWER COVER 1 Remove the right upper cover page 4 20 2 Remove the paper feed tray A by pulling it out 3 Remove the power connector cover A When removing the power connector cover pull it in the direction of the arrow ...

Page 217: ...D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment Be careful not to damage the hook on the power connector cover when you remove or install the power connector cover 4 Remove the four screws from the right lower cover A 5 Close the rear upper cover A ...

Page 218: ... 4 24 SM 6 Open the rear lower cover A and then release the hook of the right lower cover B by rotating it in the direction of the blue arrow 7 Release the hooks A and B 8 Remove the right lower cover A by rotating it in the direction of the arrow ...

Page 219: ...5 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the right lower cover when you remove or install the right lower cover Do not remove the screw A when removing the right lower cover B ...

Page 220: ...6 SM 4 6 5 LEFT UPPER COVER 1 Push the button A and open the front cover B 2 Insert a flathead screwdriver into and in order to release the three hooks of the left upper cover A 3 Remove the left upper cover A by inserting a flathead screwdriver into B ...

Page 221: ...n the inside of the left upper cover when you remove or install the left upper cover 4 6 6 LEFT MIDDLE COVER 1 Remove the following covers Left upper cover page 4 26 Left rear cover page 4 30 2 Remove the paper feed tray A by pulling it out 3 Open the waste toner bottle cover A and then remove the waste toner bottle B ...

Page 222: ...ook by lifting the left middle cover A upward 5 Release the hooks in the order of and 6 Remove the left middle cover A and waste toner bottle cover B Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left middle cover when you remove or install the left middle cover ...

Page 223: ... middle cover page 4 27 2 Remove the screw holding the left lower cover A 3 Release the hook by opening the right side of the left lower cover as shown below and then remove the left lower cover A hook 3 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left lower cover when you remove or install the left lower cover ...

Page 224: ...M 4 6 8 LEFT REAR COVER 1 Open the rear upper cover A 2 Remove the left rear cover A by rotating it in the direction of the arrow hook 2 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left rear cover when you remove or install the left rear cover ...

Page 225: ...t 4 6 9 REAR UPPER COVER 1 Remove the following covers Left lower cover page 4 29 Rear middle cover page 4 33 2 Remove the ground screw from the left side of the machine 3 Open the transparent film A hook 2 4 Disconnect two connectors and then release them from the harness guide A ...

Page 226: ...1 601 D255 D256 M281 M282 4 32 SM 5 Open the rear upper cover A 6 Release the left hinge A of the rear upper cover B by slightly bending the rear upper cover inward 7 Remove the rear upper cover A by sliding it to the left ...

Page 227: ...rear upper cover release the harness A from the mainframe 4 6 10 REAR MIDDLE COVER 1 Remove the rear lower cover page 4 35 2 Release three hooks of the rear middle cover A in the order of and When releasing the hooks at and pull the right side A of the rear middle cover while pressing each hook upward ...

Page 228: ...k at pull the left side A of the rear middle cover while pressing the hook upward 3 Remove the rear middle cover A by rotating in the direction of the arrow Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear middle cover when you remove or install the rear middle cover ...

Page 229: ...56 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 4 6 11 REAR LOWER COVER 1 Release the right hinge A of the rear lower cover B by pushing the rear lower cover inward with a flathead screwdriver 2 Remove the rear lower cover A by sliding it to the right ...

Page 230: ...age 4 37 Left upper cover page 4 26 2 Remove the screw from the rear center stay A 3 Insert a flathead screwdriver into A and B to release the hooks of the rear center stay C 4 Remove the rear center stay C Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear center stay when you remove or install the rear center stay ...

Page 231: ...EFT STAY 1 Remove the controller cover page 4 45 2 Insert a flathead screwdriver in the order of and to release three hooks of the rear left stay A 3 Remove the rear left stay A Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear right stay when you remove or install the rear right stay ...

Page 232: ...COVER 1 Remove the rear center stay page 4 36 2 Remove the two screws from the paper exit cover A 3 Remove the paper exit cover A from the right side hook 1 Be careful not to damage the hook at the rear of the paper exit cover when you remove or install the paper exit cover ...

Page 233: ... exit cover page 4 38 4 Release the lock lever A by rotating it towards you and then remove the toner cartridge B 5 Release the two hooks from the operation panel arm upper cover A 6 Insert a flathead screwdriver into A to release the hook and then remove the operation panel arm upper cover B Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the operation panel arm upper cover when you remove or...

Page 234: ...Exterior Covers MP 501 601 D255 D256 M281 M282 4 40 SM 7 Release the USB cable A and harness B of the operation panel from the harness guides 8 Remove the operation panel unit with bracket A ...

Page 235: ...M 4 41 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 9 Remove the bracket A The screw B is a sems screw Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing the paper exit tray 10 Remove the two screws from the left side cover A ...

Page 236: ... M282 4 42 SM 11 Remove the left side cover A These two screws are tapping screws Be careful not to use the wrong screws when installing the paper exit tray 12 Remove the front right cover A 13 Remove the two screws from the right side cover A ...

Page 237: ...M 4 43 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 14 Remove the right side cover A These two screws are tapping screws Be careful not to use the wrong screws when installing the paper exit tray 15 Remove the paper exit tray A ...

Page 238: ...M281 M282 4 44 SM The screw B is a sems screw Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing the paper exit tray Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the paper exit tray when you remove or install the paper exit tray ...

Page 239: ...ment 4 6 16 CONTROLLER COVER 1 Open the rear upper cover A 2 Insert a flathead screwdriver into A to release the hook of the controller cover B 3 Release the hook by opening the right side of the cover and then remove the cover A by rotating it in the direction of the blue arrow ...

Page 240: ...Exterior Covers MP 501 601 D255 D256 M281 M282 4 46 SM Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the controller cover when you remove or install the controller cover ...

Page 241: ...0 4 7 1 UPPER COVER 1 Remove the controller cover page 4 67 2 Open the upper cover A 3 Remove the two screws from the upper cover A The screw B is a sems screw The screw C is a tapping screw Be careful not use the wrong screws when installing the upper cover 4 Remove the screw from the rear side of the upper cover A ...

Page 242: ... M281 M282 4 48 SM 5 Lift the upper cover A by releasing the two hooks and then put it on the mainframe so that you can access the bracket B on the right side of the machine 6 Remove the bracket A 7 Disconnect the flat cable from the BiCU A ...

Page 243: ...before disconnecting the flat cable A as shown in the following pictures Otherwise the connector may be damaged 8 Remove the plastic sheet A from the main frame hook 2 and then remove the upper cover A Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the upper cover when you remove or install the upper cover ...

Page 244: ...5 D256 M281 M282 4 50 SM 4 7 2 FRONT COVER 1 Remove the paper feed tray A by pulling it out 2 Open the bypass tray A 3 Release the left hinge A of the bypass tray with a flathead screwdriver by slightly bending the bypass tray inward ...

Page 245: ...Exterior Covers SP 5300 5310 SM 4 51 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 4 Release the right hinge A of the bypass tray by sliding it to the left ...

Page 246: ...vers SP 5300 5310 D255 D256 M281 M282 4 52 SM 5 Remove the right connecting arm A and left connecting arm B of the bypass tray C 6 Remove the bypass tray C 7 Open the upper cover A and then open the front cover B ...

Page 247: ...00 5310 SM 4 53 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 8 Remove the screw from the switch cover A 9 Release the right hinge A of the front cover 10 Remove the switch cover A 11 Remove the spring A and power switch B ...

Page 248: ... M281 M282 4 54 SM 12 Remove the front cover A by releasing the left hinge B 4 7 3 RIGHT COVER 1 Remove the upper cover page 4 47 2 Remove the paper feed tray A by pulling it out 3 Open the front cover A 4 Remove the power connector cover A ...

Page 249: ...255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment When removing the power connector cover pull it in the direction of the arrow Be careful not to damage the hook on the power connector cover when you remove or install the power connector cover ...

Page 250: ...255 D256 M281 M282 4 56 SM 5 Remove five screws from the right cover A The screw B is a tapping screw The screw C is a long screw Be careful not to use the wrong screws when installing the right cover 6 Close the rear upper cover A ...

Page 251: ...57 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 7 Open the rear lower cover A and then release the hook of the right cover B by rotating it in the direction of the blue arrow 8 Release the four hooks and then remove the right cover A ...

Page 252: ...e inside of the right cover when you remove or install the right cover 4 7 4 LEFT UPPER COVER 1 Remove the following covers Upper cover page 4 47 Left rear cover page 4 61 2 Remove the paper feed tray A by pulling it out 3 Open the waste toner bottle cover A and then remove the waste toner bottle B ...

Page 253: ... 4 Release the hook by lifting the left upper cover A upward 5 Release the hooks in the order of and 6 Remove the left upper cover A and waste toner bottle cover B Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left upper cover when you remove or install the left upper cover ...

Page 254: ... page 4 58 2 Remove the screw holding the left lower cover A 3 Release the hook by opening the right side of the left lower cover as shown below and then remove the left lower cover A hook 3 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left lower cover when you remove or install the left lower cover ...

Page 255: ...ment and Adjustment 4 7 6 LEFT REAR COVER 1 Open the rear upper cover A 2 Remove the left rear cover A by rotating it in the direction of the arrow Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left rear cover when you remove or install the left rear cover ...

Page 256: ...2 SM 4 7 7 REAR UPPER COVER 1 Remove the following covers Left lower cover page 4 60 Rear middle cover page 4 64 2 Remove the ground screw 3 Open the transparent film A hook 2 4 Disconnect the two connectors and then release them from the harness guide A ...

Page 257: ...3 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 5 Open the rear upper cover A 6 Release the left hinge A of the rear upper cover B by slightly bending the rear upper cover inward 7 Remove the rear upper cover A by sliding it to the left ...

Page 258: ...over release the harness A from the mainframe 4 7 8 REAR MIDDLE COVER 1 Remove the rear lower cover page 4 66 2 Release three hooks of the rear middle cover A in the order of and When releasing the hooks at and pull the right side A of the rear middle cover while pressing each hook upward ...

Page 259: ...easing the hook at pull the left side A of the rear middle cover while pressing the hook upward 3 Remove the rear middle cover A by rotating in the direction of the arrow Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear middle cover when you remove or install the rear middle cover ...

Page 260: ...D255 D256 M281 M282 4 66 SM 4 7 9 REAR LOWER COVER 1 Release the right hinge A of the rear lower cover B by pushing the rear lower cover inward with a flathead screwdriver 2 Remove the rear lower cover A by sliding it to the right ...

Page 261: ...OLLER COVER 1 Open the rear upper cover A 2 Release the hook by opening the right side of the cover and then remove the cover A by rotating it in the direction of the blue arrow Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the controller cover when you remove or install the controller cover ...

Page 262: ...nt procedures for the other parts are included in the FSM for the Smart Operation Panel because these parts are also used with other models 4 8 1 OPERATION PANEL 1 Remove the following covers Scanner front cover page 4 14 Right lower cover page 4 22 2 Disconnect the USB cable A 3 Release the USB cable A from the harness guides 4 Release the two hooks from the operation panel arm upper cover A ...

Page 263: ... flathead screwdriver into A to release the hook and then remove the operation panel arm upper cover B Be careful not to damage the hooks on the operation panel arm upper cover when you remove or install the operation panel arm upper cover 6 Remove the ground screw and disconnect the connector ...

Page 264: ...Operation Panel MP 501 601 D255 D256 M281 M282 4 70 SM 7 Pull out the USB cable A 8 Remove the operation panel A from the mainframe 9 Remove the rear center cover A ...

Page 265: ...255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 10 Remove the rear right cover A and rear left cover B 11 Remove the right hinge cover A and left hinge cover lower B 12 Remove the left hinge cover upper A and left hinge cover left B hook 2 ...

Page 266: ...Operation Panel MP 501 601 D255 D256 M281 M282 4 72 SM 13 Remove the right hinge A and left hinge B 14 Remove the USB cable A and ground cable B ...

Page 267: ... the New Operation Panel There is a DIP switch A on the sub board of the operation panel The switch setting to use depends on the model Make sure that only switch No 3 and 7 are ON Otherwise SC672 11 occurs when starting the machine 4 8 2 INTERNAL PARTS Refer to the FSM for the Smart Operation Panel ...

Page 268: ... SP 5300 5310 4 9 1 OPERATION PANEL 1 Remove the upper cover page 4 47 2 Remove the sheet A from back side of the upper cover B 3 Remove the seven screws The screws A are sems screws Be careful not to use the wrong screws when installing the operation panel 4 Open the bracket A ...

Page 269: ...Operation Panel SP 5300 5310 SM 4 75 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 5 Remove the operation panel A 4 9 2 OPU BOARD 1 Remove the operation panel page 4 74 2 Remove the OPU board A ...

Page 270: ...llowing covers Scanner front cover page 4 14 Right upper cover page 4 20 Left upper cover page 4 26 Rear center stay page 4 36 2 Remove the bracket A 3 Disconnect the flat cable A and release it from the harness guide B 4 Open the clamp A and disconnect the three connectors Then release the connectors from the harness guides B ...

Page 271: ...canner Unit MP 501 601 Only SM 4 77 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 5 Remove the ground screw A 6 Remove the two screws from the rear side of the scanner unit A 7 Remove the scanner unit A ...

Page 272: ...255 D256 M281 M282 4 78 SM 4 10 2 SCANNER CARRIAGE 1 Remove the ARDF unit page 4 160 2 Remove the exposure glass A Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the exposure glass when you remove or install the exposure glass ...

Page 273: ... M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 3 Remove the clip A from the pulley B on the right side 4 Remove the plate A and carriage belt B 5 Move the scanner carriage A to the right and then remove the carriage belt B from the pulley C on the left side ...

Page 274: ...er carriage A and shaft B with the carriage belt from the mainframe When removing the scanner carriage A from the mainframe disconnect the flat cable B and release it from the harness guides at the back of the scanner carriage A 7 Remove the shaft A from the scanner carriage B ...

Page 275: ...Scanner Unit MP 501 601 Only SM 4 81 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 8 Remove the carriage belt A from the scanner carriage B hook 1 ...

Page 276: ...d unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section Laser beams can cause serious eye injury 4 11 1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION The caution decal is attached as shown below 4 11 2 LASER UNIT 1 Remove the paper exit tray page 4 39 2 Disconnect the red connector and flat cable from IOB A ...

Page 277: ...ment and Adjustment 3 Pull the flat cable A out through the apertures 4 Remove the flat cable with the bracket A by sliding it to the rear while pushing the hook B 5 Pull the red harness A out through the apertures and then release it from the harness guides ...

Page 278: ...Laser Unit MP 501 601 D255 D256 M281 M282 4 84 SM 6 Remove the laser unit A ...

Page 279: ...n OFF the main power and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section Laser beams can cause serious eye injury 4 12 1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION The caution decal is attached as shown below 4 12 2 LASER UNIT 1 Remove the controller box page 4 132 2 Disconnect the red connector from IOB A ...

Page 280: ... M281 M282 4 86 SM 3 Disconnect the flat cable 4 Remove the flat cable with the bracket A by sliding it to the rear while pushing the hook B 5 Pull the red harness A out through the apertures and then release it from the harness guides ...

Page 281: ...Laser Unit SP 5300 5310 SM 4 87 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 6 Remove the laser unit A ...

Page 282: ...255 D256 M281 M282 4 88 SM 4 13 DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4 13 1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1 Open the front cover MP 501 601 Push the button A and open the front cover B SP 5300 5310 Open the upper cover A and then open the front cover B ...

Page 283: ...81 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 2 Release the lock lever A by rotating it towards you and then remove the toner cartridge B 3 Pull out the PCDU A 4 Release the hook and then remove the container guide A by sliding it to the rear hook 1 ...

Page 284: ...M 5 Disconnect the connector 6 Release the hook A by pressing the lock lever and then remove the development unit B hook 1 4 13 2 AFTER REPLACEMENT OF DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1 Execute SP3 900 001 to supply toner to the development unit Rev 09 15 2016 ...

Page 285: ... 4 14 1 DRUM UNIT 1 Remove the development unit page 4 88 2 Remove the right lock lever A from the drum unit B Be careful not to lose the right lock lever A The right lock lever is not included in the drum unit as a service part 3 Remove the left lock lever A from the drum unit B ...

Page 286: ...Drum Unit D255 D256 M281 M282 4 92 SM Be careful not to lose the left lock lever A The left lock lever is not included in the drum unit as a service part 4 Remove the drum unit A by pulling it out ...

Page 287: ...ent 4 14 2 CHARGE ROLLER 1 Open the front cover MP 501 601 Push the button A and open the front cover B SP 5300 5310 Open the upper cover A and then open the front cover B 2 Release the lock lever A by rotating it towards you and then remove the toner cartridge B ...

Page 288: ...Drum Unit D255 D256 M281 M282 4 94 SM 3 Pull out the PCDU A 4 Remove the charge roller A from the PCDU B by pressing the lock lever C ...

Page 289: ...djustment 4 15 TRANSFER UNIT 4 15 1 TRANSFER ROLLER 1 Remove the drum unit page 4 91 2 Remove the transfer guide plate A by sliding it to the left Be careful not to damage the hooks on the transfer guide plate when you remove or install the transfer guide plate ...

Page 290: ...Transfer Unit D255 D256 M281 M282 4 96 SM 3 Remove the shaft A of the transfer roller B from the bearings on the right and left sides with a flathead screwdriver 4 Remove the transfer roller B ...

Page 291: ...d Adjustment 4 15 2 DISCHARGE PLATE UNIT 1 Remove the transfer roller page 4 95 2 Remove the discharge plate unit A by rotating it towards you Be careful not to damage the hooks on the discharge plate unit when you remove or install the discharge plate unit ...

Page 292: ...Rear upper cover page 4 26 Controller cover page 4 45 SP 5300 5310 Rear upper cover page 4 62 Controller cover page 4 67 2 Remove the connector cover A from the rear side of the machine 3 Disconnect the two connectors The connector A is gray Be careful not to connect the wrong connector when installing the fusing unit ...

Page 293: ...6 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 4 Remove the connector cover A hook 1 When removing the connector cover insert the flathead screwdriver into A and release the hook of the connector cover 5 Remove the power connector cover A ...

Page 294: ...M When removing the power connector cover pull it in the direction of the arrow Be careful not to damage the hook on the power connector cover when you remove or install the power connector cover 6 Remove the screw from the connector cover A ...

Page 295: ...using Unit SM 4 101 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 7 Release the hook and then remove the connector cover A 8 Disconnect the two connectors 9 Release the connector from the harness guide ...

Page 296: ...installing the fusing unit perform the following procedures 1 Turn ON the power switch after removing the fusing unit and opening the rear cover 2 Wait for more than 5 seconds and then turn OFF the power switch The cam on the left side turns backward and releases pressure when the power switch is turned ON 3 Reinstall the fusing unit Rev 08 09 2016 ...

Page 297: ...81 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 4 17 PAPER EXIT UNIT MP 501 601 4 17 1 PAPER EXIT UNIT 1 Remove the paper exit tray page 4 39 2 Remove the spring A from the right side of the paper exit unit B 3 Disconnect the connector from the Connect Left PCB A ...

Page 298: ... 4 Release the harness A from the harness guides 5 Remove the three screws from the left side of the machine The screw A is a ground screw and B is a big screw Be careful not to use the wrong screws when installing the paper exit unit 6 Remove the bracket A ...

Page 299: ...Paper Exit Unit MP 501 601 SM 4 105 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 7 Remove the two screws from the right side of the machine 8 Remove the paper exit unit A ...

Page 300: ...01 601 D255 D256 M281 M282 4 106 SM When removing the paper exit unit A release the four hooks from both sides of the paper exit unit When removing the paper exit unit A disconnect the connector B from the paper exit unit ...

Page 301: ...APER EXIT UNIT SP 5300 5310 4 18 1 PAPER EXIT UNIT 1 Remove the following covers Left lower cover page 4 60 Controller box page 4 132 2 Remove the spring A from the paper exit unit B 3 Disconnect the connector A from the Connect Left PCB B and then release it from the plastic harness guide C ...

Page 302: ...arness A disconnected in the previous step from the harness guides 5 Remove the three screws from the left side of the machine The screw A is a ground screw and B is a big screw Be careful not to use the wrong screws when installing the paper exit unit 6 Remove the bracket A ...

Page 303: ...Paper Exit Unit SP 5300 5310 SM 4 109 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 7 Remove the two screws from the right side of the machine 8 Remove the paper exit unit A ...

Page 304: ...00 5310 D255 D256 M281 M282 4 110 SM When removing the paper exit unit A release the four hooks from both sides of the paper exit unit When removing the paper exit unit A disconnect the connector B from the paper exit unit ...

Page 305: ...t and Adjustment 4 19 PAPER FEED UNIT 4 19 1 PAPER FEED ROLLER PICKUP ROLLER 1 Remove the paper feed tray A by pulling it out 2 Release the lock of the feed roller holder A by releasing the lever 3 Remove the paper roller holder A by pushing it to the left ...

Page 306: ...M282 4 112 SM 4 Remove the paper feed roller A from the feed roller holder B hook 1 5 Remove the pickup roller A hook 1 4 19 2 SEPARATION ROLLER 1 Remove the paper feed tray A by pulling it out 2 Remove the separation roller holder A ...

Page 307: ...Paper Feed Unit SM 4 113 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 3 Remove the spring A 4 Remove the separation roller unit A by rotating it as shown below 5 Remove the separation roller A hook 1 ...

Page 308: ...ASS PAPER FEED ROLLER 1 Remove the following covers MP 501 601 Front cover page 4 15 Right lower cover page 4 22 Left middle cover page 4 27 SP 5300 5310 Front cover page 4 50 2 Remove the bypass bottom plate unit A When removing the bypass bottom plate unit A rotate the lever B ...

Page 309: ... Tray Unit SM 4 115 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 3 Slide the shaft A of the bypass tray paper feed roller B to the right while releasing the hook 4 Remove the bypass tray paper feed roller A ...

Page 310: ...wer cover MP 501 601 page 4 29 SP 5300 5310 page 4 60 3 Remove the controller box MP 501 601 page 4 128 SP 5300 5310 page 4 132 4 Remove the PSU fan page 4 158 5 Remove the connector cover A from the rear side of the machine hook 1 When removing the connector cover insert the flathead screwdriver into A and release the hook of the connector cover ...

Page 311: ...Duplex Unit SM 4 117 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 6 Disconnect the two connectors 7 Release the harness A from the harness guide ...

Page 312: ...uplex Unit D255 D256 M281 M282 4 118 SM 8 Remove the ground screw A and disconnect the two connectors When installing wind the harness A around the clamp B twice as shown below 9 Disconnect the connector ...

Page 313: ...Duplex Unit SM 4 119 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 10 Remove the PSU A and bracket B from the mainframe hook 3 11 Close the rear upper cover A 12 Close the front cover A ...

Page 314: ...Duplex Unit D255 D256 M281 M282 4 120 SM 13 Stand the main unit front side up 14 Remove the bottom plate A 15 Remove the bottom plate A ...

Page 315: ...Duplex Unit SM 4 121 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 16 Remove the wire cover A hook 2 17 Disconnect the connector 18 Remove the seven screws from the duplex unit A ...

Page 316: ...Duplex Unit D255 D256 M281 M282 4 122 SM 19 Remove the duplex unit A while removing the shaft B from the coupling C ...

Page 317: ...placement and Adjustment 4 22 DRIVE UNIT 4 22 1 PAPER FEED MOTOR 1 Remove the IOB MP 501 601 page 4 147 SP 5300 5310 page 4 148 2 Remove the PSU fan page 4 158 3 Remove the harness from the harness guides of the bracket A 4 Remove the bracket A ...

Page 318: ...Drive Unit D255 D256 M281 M282 4 124 SM 5 Remove the paper feed motor A MP 501 601 SP 5300 5310 ...

Page 319: ...281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 4 22 2 MAIN DRIVE UNIT 1 Remove the IOB MP 501 601 page 4 147 SP 5300 5310 page 4 148 2 Remove the PSU page 4 154 3 Remove the harness from the harness guide of the bracket A 4 Remove the bracket A ...

Page 320: ... D255 D256 M281 M282 4 126 SM 5 Remove the main drive unit A Main Motor 1 Remove the main drive unit page 4 125 2 Remove the clip A and gear B from the backside of the main drive unit C 3 Remove the main motor A ...

Page 321: ...it SM 4 127 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment Drum Motor 1 Remove the main drive unit page 4 125 2 Remove the clip A and gear B from the backside of the main drive unit C 3 Remove the drum motor A ...

Page 322: ...SM 4 23 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 4 23 1 CONTROLLER BOX Controller Box MP 501 601 1 Remove the right lower cover page 4 22 2 Remove the bracket A 3 Disconnect the USB connector A of the operation panel 4 Disconnect the two flat cables and two connectors ...

Page 323: ... Make sure to open the flap before disconnecting the flat cable A as shown in the following pictures Otherwise the connector may be damaged When disconnecting the flat cable A pull it out in the direction of the arrow 5 Release the flat cable and harness from the harness guides ...

Page 324: ...SM 6 Remove the seven screws from the controller box A The screw B is a tapping screw Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing the controller box 7 Release the hook A and then remove the controller box B by rotating it counter clockwise ...

Page 325: ...stment When installing the controller box A make sure to secure the harness and flat cable to the harness guides as shown below When installing the bracket A of the controller box B do not interpose the harness and the flat cable between the bracket and the controller box ...

Page 326: ...M Controller Box SP 5300 5310 1 Remove the right cover page 4 54 2 Disconnect the flat cable and two connectors Make sure to open the flap before disconnecting the flat cable A as shown in the following pictures Otherwise the connector may be damaged ...

Page 327: ...t 3 Release the flat cable and harness from the harness guides 4 Remove the seven screws from the controller box A The screw B is a tapping screw Be careful not to use the wrong screws when installing the controller box 5 Release the hook A and then remove the controller box B ...

Page 328: ...nstalling the controller box A make sure to secure the harness and flat cable to the harness guides as shown below When installing the bracket A of the controller box B do not interpose the harness and the flat cable between the bracket and the controller box ...

Page 329: ...nt 4 23 2 CONTROLLER BOARD Controller Board MP 501 601 Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity Static electricity can damage NVRAM data 1 Remove the controller box page 4 128 2 Disconnect the connector on the controller box A 3 Remove the fax unit A ...

Page 330: ...ts D255 D256 M281 M282 4 136 SM 4 Remove the cap A 5 Remove the slot cover A 6 Remove the controller box cover A The screw B is a small screw Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing the controller box cover ...

Page 331: ...ment and Adjustment 7 Remove the controller board A with the BiCU B Be careful not to damage the backside of the controller board A and the BiCU B 8 Remove the controller board A from the BiCU B 9 Remove the two guide rails A from the controller board B hook 2 ...

Page 332: ... orientation Install the NVRAM so that the indentation on the NVRAM corresponds with the mark B on the controller board Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the controller board and NVRAM Controller Board SP 5300 5310 Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity Static electricity can damage NVRAM data 1 Remove the controller box page 4 132 2 Remove the cap A...

Page 333: ... the slot cover A 4 Remove the controller box cover A The screw B is a small screw Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing the controller box cover 5 Remove the controller board A with the BiCU B Be careful not to damage the backside of the controller board A and the BiCU B ...

Page 334: ...move the two NVRAMs A from the old controller board and install them on the new controller board Make sure the NVRAM A is installed at the correct mounting location and orientation Install the NVRAM so that the indentation on the NVRAM corresponds with the mark B on the controller board Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the controller board and NVRAM ...

Page 335: ...pload the NVRAM data from the controller board 6 Make sure the customer has a backup of their address book data If not obtain the backup by referring to SP5 846 051 The address data stored in the machine will be discarded later during this procedure So be sure to obtain a backup of the customer s address book data Note that the counters for the user will be reset when doing the backup restore of t...

Page 336: ...ansmission standby file If any standby file exists ask the customer to delete it or complete the transmission 8 Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord 9 Turn ON the main power again to discharge the residual charge 10 Replace the NVRAM with a new one 11 Turn ON the main power For SP 5300 5310 SC995 will be displayed after turning ON the main power For MP 501 601 SC995 might be internall...

Page 337: ...etting MP 501 601 only 19 For MP 501 601 if the security functions HDD Encryption and HDD Data Overwrite Security were applied set the functions again 20 Ask the customer to restore their address book Or restore the address book data using SP5 846 052 UCS Setting Restore All Addr Book and ask the customer to ensure the address book data has been restored properly If you have obtained a backup of t...

Page 338: ...ng If a message tells you need an SD card to restore displays after the NVRAM replacement create a SD card for restoration and restore with the SD card Refer to the following MP 501 601 page 2 149 Encryption Key Restoration SP 5300 5310 page 2 152 Encryption Key Restoration 4 23 3 BICU Fuse condition on the BiCU is below Address MP 501 601 SP 5300 5310 FU1 5A 76V T0 5A 63V 1 Remove the controller ...

Page 339: ...NVRAM EEPROM on the BiCU 1 Make sure that you have the SMC report Factory SP Settings This report comes with the machine page 2 8 If you do not have the SMC report enter the factory settings while referring to the Factory SP Settings page 4 10 2 Output the SMC data ALL using SP5 990 001 SP5 992 001 3 Turn OFF the main power 4 Insert a blank SD card in the SD Card Slot 2 and then turn ON the main p...

Page 340: ... CPM set SP5 882 001 For information on how to configure the above SPs contact the supervisor in your branch office 10 Turn the main power OFF ON 11 Execute SP5 801 002 Memory Clear Engine 12 Turn OFF the main power and then turn it back ON 13 From the SD card where you saved the NV RAM data in step 5 download the NV RAM data with SP5 825 001 14 Turn OFF the main power and then remove the SD card ...

Page 341: ...47 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 4 23 4 IOB IOB MP 501 601 1 Remove the controller box page 4 128 2 Remove the bracket A hook 2 3 Remove the IOB A 4 Remove the NVRAM A from the old IOB and attach it to the new IOB ...

Page 342: ...AM corresponds with the mark on the IOB Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the IOB and NVRAM IOB SP 5300 5310 1 Remove the controller box page 4 132 2 Disconnect the two connectors and then release them from the harness guides 3 Remove the bracket A hook 2 4 Disconnect the two flat cables ...

Page 343: ...OB Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the IOB and NVRAM Replacing the NVRAM EEPROM on the IOB 1 Make sure that you have the SMC report Factory SP Settings This report comes with the machine If you do not have the SMC report enter the factory settings while referring to the Factory SP Settings 2 Output the SMC data ALL using the SP 5990 001 Print or SP 5992 001 SD card 3 Power off...

Page 344: ... For information on how to configure the above SP contact the supervisor in your branch office Displayed number will be changed to 0 soon after setting SP4 698 003 to 1 This is normal operation and the SP has been executed correctly 9 Execute SP3 900 002 Toner Install Mode Off 10 Set the below SPs to see the SMC report Factory SP Settings from step 1 or 2 SP4 108 001 Sub Scan Speed Adjustment SP4 ...

Page 345: ...he laser unit MP 501 601 page 4 82 SP 5300 5310 page 4 85 2 For SP 5300 5310 remove the left upper cover page 4 58 3 Disconnect the flat cable and harness from the Connect Left PCB A 4 Disconnect the connector from the left side of the machine 5 Release the harness from the harness guides of the laser fan unit A ...

Page 346: ...Electrical Components D255 D256 M281 M282 4 152 SM 6 Remove the laser fan unit A hook 1 7 Remove the Connect Left PCB A ...

Page 347: ...MISTOR CONNECTION PCB 1 Remove the following covers MP 501 601 Paper exit tray page 4 39 SP 5300 5310 Upper cover page 4 47 2 Remove the screw which is fixing the fusing thermistor connection PCB A 3 Turn over the fusing thermistor connection PCB A and then disconnect the flat cable and connectors ...

Page 348: ...mponents D255 D256 M281 M282 4 154 SM 4 23 7 POWER PACK 1 Remove the duplex unit page 4 116 2 Remove the power pack A hook 2 When removing the power pack disconnect two connectors from back side of the power pack A ...

Page 349: ...tment When installing the power pack insert the actuator A through the hole B of the power pack C 4 23 8 PSU 1 Remove the controller box MP 501 601 page 4 128 SP 5300 5310 page 4 132 2 Remove the PSU fan page 4 159 3 Remove the ground screw A and release the two connectors ...

Page 350: ...cal Components D255 D256 M281 M282 4 156 SM When installing wind the harness A around the clamp B twice as shown below 4 Disconnect the two connectors 5 Remove the PSU A and bracket B from the mainframe hook 3 ...

Page 351: ...e address book data to an SD card with SP5 846 051 if possible If the customer uses the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type M19 NFC Card Reader Type M24 or OCR Unit Type M13 these applications must be installed again 1 Remove the controller board with the BiCU page 4 135 2 Remove the HDD with the bracket A from the controller box B hook 2 3 Remove the HDD A from the HDD bracket ...

Page 352: ...fter Replacement 1 Execute SP5 832 001 to initialize the HDD Initialization should be performed for the HDD which has already been formatted before 2 If applicable execute SP5 846 052 to restore the address data from SD card to the HDD 3 Turn the main power OFF ON ...

Page 353: ...4 24 1 PSU FAN 1 Remove the right lower cover MP 501 601 page 4 22 SP 5300 5310 page 4 54 2 Disconnect the connector of the PSU fan A from the right side of the machine 3 Release the hook A by lifting the fan bracket B hook 1 4 Remove the PSU fan with the bracket A hook 2 ...

Page 354: ...Fans D255 D256 M281 M282 4 160 SM 5 Remove the PSU fan A from the bracket hook 3 4 24 2 DIRECTION OF INSTALLING THE FANS ...

Page 355: ... Adjustment 4 25 ARDF MP 501 601 ONLY 4 25 1 ARDF UNIT 1 Remove the right upper cover page 4 20 2 Remove the ground screw and release the clamp from the rear side of the machine 3 Release the harness from the harness guides and clamp 4 Disconnect the three connectors ...

Page 356: ...ARDF MP 501 601 Only D255 D256 M281 M282 4 162 SM 5 Open the ARDF A 6 Remove the ARDF unit A by lifting it up ...

Page 357: ...D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 4 25 2 ARDF PAPER FEED ROLLER ARDF PICKUP ROLLER 1 Open the ARDF upper cover A 2 Rotate the lock lever A to the unlock position hook 1 3 Remove the ARDF paper feed roller and ARDF pickup roller A ...

Page 358: ... D255 D256 M281 M282 4 164 SM 4 25 3 ARDF FRICTION PAD 1 Remove the ARDF paper feed roller and ARDF pickup roller page 4 163 2 Remove the ARDF friction pad A hook 2 4 25 4 ARDF INVERTER MOTOR 1 Open the ARDF upper cover A ...

Page 359: ...165 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 2 Remove the ARDF rear cover A hook 4 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the ARDF rear cover when you remove or install the ARDF rear cover 3 Remove the ARDF inverter motor A ...

Page 360: ...82 4 166 SM 4 25 5 ARDF PAPER FEED MOTOR ARDF PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Open the ARDF upper cover A 2 Remove the ARDF rear cover A hook 4 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the ARDF rear cover when you remove or install the ARDF rear cover ...

Page 361: ...ARDF MP 501 601 Only SM 4 167 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 3 Disconnect the eight connectors from the rear side of the ARDF 4 Release the harness from the harness guides ...

Page 362: ...Remove the ARDF inverter motor unit A hook 1 The screw B is a ground screw Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing the ARDF paper feed motor and ARDF paper transport motor 6 Remove the ARDF paper feed motor and ARDF paper transport motor A ...

Page 363: ...ent 4 26 PAPER FEED UNIT PAPER FEED UNIT PB1100 4 26 1 PAPER FEED ROLLER PICKUP ROLLER 1 Remove the paper feed tray A of the optional paper feed unit by pulling it out 2 Slide the shaft A to the left while pushing the release lever B 3 Remove the feed roller holder A by sliding it to the left ...

Page 364: ...4 170 SM 4 Remove the paper feed roller A from the feed roller holder B hook 1 5 Remove the pickup roller A hook 1 4 26 2 SEPARATION ROLLER 1 Remove the paper feed tray A of the optional paper feed unit by pulling it out 2 Remove the separation roller holder A ...

Page 365: ...d Unit Paper Feed Unit PB1100 SM 4 171 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 3 Remove the spring A 4 Remove the separation roller A by rotating it as shown below 5 Remove the separation roller A hook 1 ...

Page 366: ...nal paper feed unit from the main machine 2 If the optional paper feed unit is installed on the caster table uninstall it from the caster table 3 Remove the paper feed tray A of the optional paper feed unit by pulling it out 4 Turn over the optional paper feed unit A and then remove the board cover B hook 2 ...

Page 367: ...5 Remove the main board A hook 3 4 26 4 DRIVE UNIT 1 Uninstall the optional paper feed unit from the main machine 2 If the optional paper feed unit is installed on the caster table uninstall it from the caster table 3 Remove the paper feed tray A of the optional paper feed unit by pulling it out ...

Page 368: ... the optional paper feed unit A and then remove the board cover B hook 2 5 Release the harness of the main board A from the harness guides 6 Disconnect the five connectors from the main board A 7 Turn over the optional paper feed unit again and then remove the upper cover A hook 1 ...

Page 369: ...Feed Unit Paper Feed Unit PB1100 SM 4 175 D255 D256 M281 M282 Replacement and Adjustment 8 Remove the drive unit A from the upper cover B When removing the drive unit A remove the coupling B from the shaft C ...

Page 370: ......

Page 371: ...SAMf FONT1 PCL Font Controller board GW3a_pcl_fntI FONT2 PS3 Font Controller board GW2e_prt_psfnt8 Engine IOB BRMF1a_eplot Engine IPU BiCU BRMF1a_eipu NetworkDocBox Controller board BRMF1a_netfile Media print JPEG TIFF Printer Controller board BRZMF1e_printer Web Support Controller board BRZMF1a_web Network Support Controller board BRZMF1a_net PowerSaving Sys Controller board BRZMF1e_subcpu PCL Co...

Page 372: ...tion Panel CPU board M2a_cspf LegacyUI type 1 Smart Operation Panel CPU board M2a_LegacyUI Fax RX File Widget Smart Operation Panel CPU board M2a_WFaxInfo Quick Scanner Smart Operation Panel CPU board M2a_SimpleScan Quick Copy Smart Operation Panel CPU board M2a_SimpleCopy Quick Fax Smart Operation Panel CPU board M2a_SimpleFax Stop Widget Smart Operation Panel CPU board M2a_WStopKey Eco friendly ...

Page 373: ...etworkDocBox Controller board BRMF1a_netfile Media print JPEG TIFF Printer Controller board BRZMF1e_printer Web Support Controller board BRZMF1a_web Network Support Controller board BRZMF1a_net PowerSaving Sys Controller board BRZMF1e_subcpu PCL Controller board BRMF1e_prt_PCL RPCS Controller board BRMF1e_prt_RPCS PS PDF Controller board BRMF1e_prt_PDF PS3 Controller board BRMF1e_prt_PS3 System Co...

Page 374: ... the card scratch it or give it a strong shock Before downloading firmware on an SD card check whether write protection of the SD card is canceled If write protection is enabled an error code error code 44 etc will be displayed during download and the download will fail Before updating firmware remove the network cable from this machine If SC818 is generated during software update switch the power...

Page 375: ...r the card is properly in the SD Card Slot When a SD card is inserted a click is heard and it is locked To remove the card release by pressing once in the set state 5 Turn ON the main power 6 Wait until the update screen starts about 45 seconds When it appears Please Wait is displayed 7 Check whether a program installation screen is displayed English display When two or more software modules are c...

Page 376: ... Display installed module number version information NEW Display module number version information in the card The upper row corresponds to the module number the lower row corresponds to the version name 8 Select the module with the module selection button or 10 key operation The selected module is highlighted and Verify and Update are displayed Depending on the combination of update software it m...

Page 377: ...ware modules are to be updated printer in the second row shows that the module updated last is the printer When more than one are updated simultaneously only what was updated last is displayed When Verify has completed normally the Update done display of the above screen is Verify done If Verify Error is displayed reinstall the software of the application displayed in the lower row 11 After turnin...

Page 378: ...raight in the SD Card Slot 2 lower If the customer has used all of the slots you have to keep an empty slot for this procedure Ask the customer to temporarily remove the SD card in SD Card Slot 2 Check whether the card is properly in the SD Card Slot When a SD card is inserted a click is heard and it is locked To remove the card release by pressing once in the set state 5 Turn ON the main power 6 ...

Page 379: ...tly updated List Test Print Config Page 16 Reassemble the machine An error code is shown if an error occurs during the download Error codes have the letter E and a number If an error occurs the firmware is not correctly downloaded see the error code table page 5 9 and do the necessary steps After this download the firmware again If firmware update is interrupted by power failure the firmware is no...

Page 380: ...red when ROM update program started Controller program abnormal If the second attempt fails replace controller board 22 Decompression of compressed data failed Switch the main power supply off and on to try again Replace the SD card used for the update Replace the controller board if the above solutions do not solve the problem 24 SD card access error Re insert the SD card Switch the main power su...

Page 381: ...e after the correct SD card has been inserted In this case try again with a different SD card Replace the controller board if the above solutions do not solve the problem Replace all relevant boards if the update is done for the BiCU and FCU Replace the operation panel unit if the update is done for the operation panel 33 Card version error The wrong card version is downloaded Install the correct ...

Page 382: ...he version of the downloaded program has not been authorized for the update Make sure that the program to be overwritten is the specified version 40 Engine download fails Switch the main power supply off and on to try again If the download fails again replace the controller board and the BiCU 41 Fax download fails 1 Switch the main power supply off and on to try again If the download fails again r...

Page 383: ...ot Prohibit and try again 50 The results of the electronic authorization check have rejected the update data Install the correct ROM update data in the SD card 57 Remote is not connected at the date time reserved for receiving the package firmware update from the network 1 Check the Remote connection 58 Update cannot be done due to a reception route problem 1 Check the Remote connection 59 HDD is ...

Page 384: ...date from the network 1 Update is to be done automatically when the next reception time has elapsed 66 Reception failed due to the status error of the machine at the reserved date time of the package firmware update from the network 1 Reset the reservation date time for the remote update 67 Acquisition of the latest version information from the Gateway fails at the reserved date time of the remote...

Page 385: ...the package firmware update from the network 1 Set the setting of Remote Service in the Administrator Tools to Do not Prohibit 1 The error occurs in MP 501 601 only The PDF firmware installed as standard contains a program required to print PS3 data as default However this PS3 program is normally disabled The PS3 firmware is a dongle key which enables PS3 data printing functions When the PS3 firmw...

Page 386: ...MWARE In this machine software can be updated by remote control using Remote 5 2 1 RFU PERFORMABLE CONDITION RFU is performable for a device which meets the following conditions 1 The customer consents to the use of RFU 2 The devise is connected to a network via TCP IP for Remote ...

Page 387: ...pdate via a network SFU Smart Firmware Update There are two methods for SFU Immediate Update To update the firmware when visiting Update at the next visit To set the date and time for downloading The firmware will be automatically downloaded beforehand and updated at the following visit Update at the next visit is recommended since firmware download may take some minutes due to the network conditi...

Page 388: ...vailable N A 5 3 2 IMMEDIATE UPDATE Enter the Firmware Update menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware The Firmware Update button will appear even when a machine is connected to Remote with a device which does not have an embedded Remote communicating function If an error code is displayed refer to Error Screens During Updating page 5 9 1 Enter the SP mode 2 Touch Firmware Update 3 Touc...

Page 389: ...ich indicates that the download of the firmware has failed is displayed implement this procedure from step 1 Update will be started automatically after the download is finished When the machine is in the update mode the automatic update is suspended if a print job is implemented After the print job is finished touch YES on the display shown with the following picture to restart updating ...

Page 390: ...r right of the display indicate Number of updated items All items to be updated 5 3 3 UPDATE AT THE NEXT VISIT RESERVE It is possible to set the machine to download the package firmware which is necessary for SFU in advance and then perform the actual installation at the next service visit This saves waiting time for the firmware to download at the service visit ...

Page 391: ...enu in the SP mode and update the package firmware The Firmware Update button will appear even when a machine is connected to Remote with a device which does not have an embedded Remote communicating function If an error code is displayed refer to Error Screens During Updating page 5 9 1 Enter the SP mode 2 Touch Firmware Update 3 Touch Reserve 4 Touch Reservation setting ...

Page 392: ...mware download fails or cannot be completed due to the network settings condition no power to the machine or other reason the machine will continue retrying every six hours until the scheduled deadline up to a maximum of four tries For example if the download is set for the day before the next visit the machine will attempt the download at 24 hours before the visit and then continue trying every s...

Page 393: ...n power OFF while the download is in progress If the download cannot be completed successfully by the time of the next scheduled visit the machine will stop trying to download the firmware How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE 1 Enter the SP mode 2 Touch Firmware Update 3 Touch Reserve 4 Touch Reserve and received package information ...

Page 394: ...ed successfully the details of the download result are displayed as the following picture shows This information will only be displayed if the reserved firmware has already been downloaded If not all the data items are indicated with How to Install Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE 1 Enter the SP mode 2 Touch Firmware Update 3 Touch Update ...

Page 395: ... the reserved package in the HDD is older than the latest version the messages shown in the following picture are displayed If you wish to download the latest version touch Execute beside the message Download and update the latest package Then update of the package firmware will be started If you wish to update using the firmware in the HDD old version touch Execute beside the message Update to th...

Page 396: ...MP 501 601 Only D255 D256 M281 M282 5 26 SM 6 Update done message is displayed The machine will automatically reboot itself The figures at the lower right of the display indicate Number of updated items All items to be updated ...

Page 397: ...SD card and then name it package 2 Copy the package firmware xxxxxxxx pkg to this folder If you copy the package firmware into the conventional romdata folder the update will not work Only one version of the package firmware should be copied into the folder If you copy multiple versions of package firmware to the SD card the machine will select only one version of the firmware randomly 3 Turn OFF ...

Page 398: ...ouch OK to move to step 4 above 6 Update is started automatically after the package firmware download to the HDD has been completed 7 When update is completed Update done is displayed The figures at the lower right of the display indicate Number of updated items All items to be updated 8 Turn OFF the main power and then pull out the SD card from the SD Card Slot 2 lower 9 Turn ON the main power ...

Page 399: ...There is a possibility that an SC and boot failure occurs If you accidentally turn OFF the main power during the updating retry the updating procedure from the beginning If the update fails again you will need to replace the controller board 1 If the boot priority application is set to the ESA application switch to the copy application in Function Priority User Tools Machine Features System Settin...

Page 400: ...e results Failure script file mnt sd0 sdk update bootscript 2012 08 22 17 57 47 start XXXX Error 2012 08 22 17 57 57 end FAIL Boot script path Boot scripts processing start time Error message Possibly multiple End time boot script processing the results Error Message Cause Remedy PIECEMARK Error machine XXXXX Applied the wrong updating tool Using the updating tool of a different model Use the corr...

Page 401: ...left on device paseCopy error The destination directory cannot be made paseCopy error fileCopy Error Copy Error Writing destination is full The NAND flash memory on the controller board is full Uninstall the unnecessary SDK applications If you can not uninstall it implement escalation stating the model name application configuration SMC sheet SP5 990 006 024 025 and error file Put Error 1 Error no...

Page 402: ...size setting in Heap Stack Size Settings Device Management Configuration Extended Feature Settings Administrator Tools Heap Stack Size Settings 3 Stop all SDK applications except for Java TM Platform 1 Display the Startup Setting menu Device Management Configuration Extended Feature Settings Startup Setting 2 Check the radio button of the SDK application which status is Starting Up 3 Click Start U...

Page 403: ...etter is f 3 Download the update modules from Firmware Download Center 4 Unzip the downloaded file and then execute the exe file 5 The folder is generated 6 Execute the bat file in the folder 7 Input the drive letter following a message Please input drive letter of SD card a x If the SD memory card reader writer is detected as F input f 8 Press the Enter key to start updating Java VM It takes 3 mi...

Page 404: ... Change the setting of Auto Start to On for each SDK application 1 Display the Startup Setting menu Device Management Configuration Extended Feature Settings Startup Setting 2 Click the Details icon for each SDK application 3 Make sure that Auto Start is set to On Default On 4 Reconfigure the heap size setting in Heap Stack Size Settings Device Management Configuration Extended Feature Settings Ad...

Page 405: ...g log FCU debug log MP 501 601 only Operation panel log Communication log network packet Configuration page Printer setting list Font list Error log Fax information MP 501 601 only SMC In older models a service representative enabled the logging tool after a problem occurred After that when the problem had been reproduced the service representative was able to retrieve the debug log However this n...

Page 406: ...roller SC occurs When saving by manual operation with the Number keys and the Reset key Press Reset 0 1 and C hold for 3 seconds When the operation unit detects an error When the operation panel detects an error Operation panel 400 MB Up to 30 times When updating the firmware for the operation panel the debug logs are erased Debug logs are not saved in the following conditions When there is no HDD...

Page 407: ...f the problems e g At around 8 00 am on March 10 an engine stall occurred The operation panel does not respond Turn the main power OFF ON You need to retrieve the debug logs dating back three days from the date of the problem Analysis of the debug log is effective for problems caused by the software Analysis of the debug log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by h...

Page 408: ...og is as follows Transfer time may be affected by the type or format of the SD card It is recommended that you format the SD card using the Panasonic SD Formatter freeware Controller debug log GW debug log 2 20 minutes Engine debug log 2 minutes Operation panel log 2 20 minutes 7 Make sure that the SD card access LED is off then remove the SD card If failed appears on the operation panel turn the ...

Page 409: ...ne number gps PrintSettingList PrintSettingList_RTIFF_yyyymmdd_hhmms s csv Font list LogTrace machine number gps FontPage FontPage_PCL_the page number_yyyymmdd_hhmmss jpg LogTrace machine number gps FontPage FontPage_PDF_the page number_yyyymmdd_hhmmss jpg LogTrace machine number gps FontPage FontPage_PS_the page number_yyyymmdd_hhmmss jpg Error log LogTrace machine number gps ErrorLog yyyymmdd_hh...

Page 410: ...t before you turn OFF the main power You will need a record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails 2 Turn OFF the main power 3 Remove the controller cover MP 501 601 page 4 45 SP 5300 5310 page 4 67 4 Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 2 lower A MP 501 601 SP 5300 5310 5 Turn ON the main power 6 Press Execute in SP5 824 001 NVRAM Data Upload 7 The following files are coped to an NVRAM folder ...

Page 411: ... the NVRAM in the machine The NVRAM data download may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged or if the connection between the controller and BiCU is defective Do the download procedure again if the download fails Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the NVRAM data 1 Turn OFF the main power ...

Page 412: ...of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine for the NVRAM data to download successfully The download fails if the serial numbers do not match This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM Total Count C O P O Count MP 501 601 only ...

Page 413: ...mage Monitor Setting Web Service Settings System Settings Screen Features Home screen customization settings 1 1 Wallpaper cannot be exported if Live Wallpapers is selected Data that cannot be imported or exported Some System Settings 1 2 1 The setting for the date settings that require the device certificate and settings that need to be adjusted for each machine for example image adjustment setti...

Page 414: ...the control panel the data is saved on an SD card 1 Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the operation panel 2 Log in from the operation panel as an administrator with all privileges 3 Press System Settings 4 Press Administrator Tools 5 Press Next three times 6 Press Device Setting Information Export Memry Strge Devc 7 Set the export conditions Specify whether to Include or Exclude...

Page 415: ...e operation panel 2 Log in from the operation panel as an administrator with all privileges 3 Press System Settings 4 Press Administrator Tools 5 Press Next three times 6 Press Device Setting Information Import Memry Strge Devc 7 Configure the import conditions Press Select of the Device Setting Info File to select the file s to import Specify whether to Include or Exclude the Device Unique Inform...

Page 416: ...ttings that can only be specified via Web Image Monitor or Web Service for example Bonjour SSDP setting Settings for the date and time Settings that require the device certificate Settings that need to be adjusted for each printer for example image adjustment settings Settings exclusively for executing functions and settings exclusively for viewing Exporting Device Information This can be exported...

Page 417: ...Re enter the encryption key Select Accept 14 Select Export Export 15 When the confirmation screen appears select Yes 16 Make sure the message regarding that the exporting process being successfully completed appears Select Exit 17 Log out If data export fails the details of the error can be viewed in the log When device Information is periodically imported it is necessary to create the device sett...

Page 418: ...appears select Yes 16 Make sure the message regarding that the exporting process being successfully completed appears Select Exit 17 Log out If import or export fails you can check the log for the error The log is stored in the same location as the exported device setting information file 5 7 4 SP DATA IMPORT EXPORT MP 501 601 Data that can be imported and exported System SP Printer SP Fax SP Scan...

Page 419: ...f imported Example Serial number Information related to Remote 2 Items for managing the history of the machine Example Time and date Counter information Installation date 3 Setting values for the Engine Secret Secret information is exported if you select Secret setting Secret information 1 Data that cannot be exported without being encrypted Exported data is encrypted Example Password Encryption k...

Page 420: ...rting Device Information Import device information saved on an SD card 1 Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the operation panel 2 Enter SP mode 3 Press SP5 749 101 Import Export Import 4 Select a unique setting 5 Press Encryption Key if the encryption key was created when the file was exported 6 Select an encryption setting Unique If you want to apply the unique information to th...

Page 421: ...ol panel the data is saved on an SD card 1 Remove the controller cover page 4 67 2 Insert the SD card into the SD Card Slot 2 lower A 3 Turn the main power ON 4 Enter SP mode 5 Select SP5 749 001 Import Export Export 6 If you want to include the unique information in the exported file select Unique 7 Select Encryption Enter an encryption key Select Accept 8 Press EXECUTE 9 Press OK If data export ...

Page 422: ...Insert the SD card into the SD Card Slot 2 lower A 3 Turn the main power ON 4 Enter SP mode 5 Select SP5 749 101 Import Export Import 6 If you want to include the unique information in the imported file select Unique 7 Select Encryption Enter an encryption key Select Accept 8 Press EXECUTE 9 Press OK If data export fails the details of the error can be viewed in the log ...

Page 423: ...u cannot solve the problem or do not know how to solve it after checking the code note down the error log entry then contact your supervisor Result Code Cause Solutions 2 INVALID REQUEST A file import was attempted between different models or machines with different device configurations Import files exported from the same model with the same device configurations 4 INVALID OUTPUT DIR Failed to wr...

Page 424: ...r the Error Ng Name 2 INVALID VALUE The specified value exceeds the allowable range 3 PERMISSION ERROR The permission to edit the setting is missing 4 NOT EXIST The setting does not exist in the system 5 INTERLOCK ERROR The setting cannot be changed because of the system status or interlocking with other specified settings 6 OTHER ERROR The setting cannot be changed for some other reason 21 INVALI...

Page 425: ... MP 501 601 Registration No User Code E mail Protection Code Fax Destination Fax Option Group Name Key Display Select Title Folder Local Authentication Folder Authentication Account ACL New Document Initial ACL LDAP Authentication SP 5300 5310 Registration No User Code Local Authentication Authentication Lock out Account ACL New Document Initial ACL LDAP Authentication Group Entry Number Group Nam...

Page 426: ...card into SD Card Slot 2 lower A MP 501 601 SP 5300 5310 6 Turn ON the main power 7 Enter the SP mode 8 Execute SP5 846 051 Backup All Addr Book 9 Exit the SP mode and then turn OFF the main power 10 Remove the SD card form the SD Card Slot 2 lower 11 Reassemble the machine If the capacity of SD card is not enough to store the local user information an error message is displayed Carefully handle t...

Page 427: ...601 SP 5300 5310 4 Turn ON the main power 5 Enter the SP mode 6 Execute SP5 846 052 Restore All Addr Book 7 Exit the SP mode and then turn OFF the main power 8 Remove the SD card from the SD Card Slot 2 lower 9 Reassemble the machine The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor uploaded If there ...

Page 428: ...main power 2 Insert the SD card into the operation panel SD card slot Then turn ON the main power 3 Enter SP mode 4 Select System SP 5 Select SP5 992 SP Text Mode 6 Select a detail SP number shown below to save data on the SD card SP5 992 xxx SP Text Mode Detail No SMC Categories to Save 001 All Data List 002 SP Mode Data List 003 User Program 004 Logging Data 005 Diagnostic Report 006 Non Default...

Page 429: ...er SP 027 SmartOperationPanel SP 028 SmartOperationPanel UP 7 Press EXECUTE 8 Press EXECUTE again to start Press CANCEL to cancel the saving 9 It is executing it is shown on the screen while executing 10 Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until Completed is shown The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete Press CANCEL to abort executing ...

Page 430: ...power 3 Enter the Engine in the SP mode Service 4 Select SP5 992 SP Text Mode 5 Select a detail SP number shown below to save data on the SD card and press OK SP5 992 xxx SP Text Mode Detail No SMC Categories to Save 001 All Data List 002 SP Mode Data List 003 User Program 004 Logging Data 005 Diagnostic Report 006 Non Default 007 NIB Summary 024 SDK J Summary 025 SDK J Application Info 026 Printe...

Page 431: ...it from SP mode 5 9 3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS The SMC list data saved on the SD card will be named automatically The file naming rules are as follows Example A Machine serial number fixed for each machine B SP number saved in this file First four digits 5992 in this part are fixed The other one or two digits are the detail SP number s In this case it is one digit Therefore this file is o...

Page 432: ...alue This part is fixed A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this function is executed This function can save the SMC list data only to an SD card inserted into the operation panel SD card slot 5 9 4 ERROR MESSAGES SMC List Card Save error message Failed FACTOR Read only file system No space left on device If an error occurs pressing Exit will cause the d...

Page 433: ...If select 0 with SP2 109 006 the color adjusted so will not show up in the test pattern 4 To print touch Copy Window then set settings within the following window for test print paper size etc 5 Press Start to start test print 6 After checking test pattern press SP Mode to return to SP mode display 7 Reset all settings to the default values SP2 109 003 SP2 109 006 8 Exit SP mode No Pattern No Patt...

Page 434: ... 64 SM No Pattern No Pattern 8 Grid Pattern Large 21 Grayscale Horizontal 9 Argyle Pattern Small 22 Two Beam Density Pattern 10 Argyle Pattern Large 23 Full Dot Pattern 11 Independent Pattern 1dot 24 All White Pattern 12 Independent Pattern 2dot ...

Page 435: ... 2 dot 17 Black Band Horizontal 5 Grid Vertical Line 18 Black Band Vertical 6 Grid Horizontal Line 19 Checker Flag Pattern 7 Grid Pattern Small 20 Grayscale Vertical 8 Grid Pattern Large 21 Grayscale Horizontal 9 Argyle Pattern Small 22 Two Beam Density Pattern 10 Argyle Pattern Large 23 Full Dot Pattern 11 Independent Pattern 1dot 24 All White Pattern 12 Independent Pattern 2dot 3 To change the d...

Page 436: ......

Page 437: ...09 15 2016 Added SC636 01 55 12 14 2016 Added SC672 00 57 03 08 2017 Added SC673 10 111 03 08 2017 Added Troubleshooting Guide Image Quality Black or White spots repeat at 30mm or 96mm intervals 119 126 02 09 2017 Added When SC672 Controller start up error is displayed ...

Page 438: ......

Page 439: ...Occurrence alarm count Immediate alarm B When a function is selected the SC is displayed on the operation panel and the machine cannot be used down time mitigation Switch main power from OFF to ON Occurrence alarm count Power OFF ON Alarm count and alarm only if recurrence C No display on the operation panel and use is permitted Count only logging Occurrence Logging count alarm count D The SC is d...

Page 440: ...y is logged up to the last 10 entries and if there are more than 10 entries data are progressively deleted starting from the oldest 6 1 3 SC AUTOMATIC REBOOT MP 501 601 When an ordinary SC pattern D is generated automatically reboot is performed Automatic reboot or reboot by user operation can be set by SP5 875 001 SC automatic reboot setting out default value 0 Automatic reboot When a type D occu...

Page 441: ... corresponding SC is the object of an automatic reboot 1 NRS alarm Issued when an ordinary SC type D is generated twice while the total counter counts 10 times Time to automatic reboot Reboot is performed 30 seconds after an engine reboot is possible after the end of post processing during printing etc At that time a reboot is performed even if the machine is operating The engine does not start pr...

Page 442: ...Self Diagnostic Mode D255 D256 M281 M282 6 4 SM ...

Page 443: ...reshold when the white guide plate was scanned Error detection timing During a scan from the exposure glass When the scanning of white guide plate is completed when the SHGH is negated During a scan from ARDF During the shading operation When the scanning of white guide plate is completed when the SHGH is negated Condensation in scanner unit Connector disconnected Scanner Carriage defective BiCU d...

Page 444: ...ure glass If the white guide plate is in an unusual state replace the white guide plate 3 Scanner carriage defective Replace the scanner carriage 4 BiCU defective Replace the BiCU 5 Harness defective Replace the following harnesses Scanner Carriage BiCU harness BiCU IOB harness 6 IOB defective Replace the IOB SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC101 02 D Lamp Error Detectin...

Page 445: ...occurs by cycling the power after each step 1 Reconnect the connector Reconnect the following connectors Scanner Carriage BiCU connector SBU LEDB connector SBU side connector on the scanner carriage BiCU IOB harness 2 Check the white guide plate exposure glass Check the white guide plate attached to the exposure glass If the white guide plate is in an unusual state replace the white guide plate 3 ...

Page 446: ...by turning the main power OFF then ON If the SC occurs again do the following steps Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step 1 Reconnect the connector Reconnect the following connectors Scanner Carriage BiCU connector SBU LEDB connector SBU side connector on the scanner carriage BiCU IOB harness 2 Check the white guide plate exposure glass Check the white guide plate attached ...

Page 447: ...carriage by hand to check whether it is unusually difficult to move 2 Check that the scanner driving belt is not disengaged 3 Reconnect the following connector Scanner Motor Controller Board connector 4 If the connector is broken shorted or grounded replace the connector 5 Replace the scanner motor Scanner HP sensor defective 1 Check that the scanner HP sensor is correctly positioned 2 Reconnect t...

Page 448: ... defective Harness defective IOB defective Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON If the SC occurs again do the following steps Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step 1 Reconnect the following connectors Scanner Carriage BiCU connector BiCU IOB connector 2 Scanner carriage defective Replace the scanner carriage 3 BiCU defective Replace the BiCU 4 Harness def...

Page 449: ...SC occurs again do the following steps Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step 1 Reconnect the following connectors Scanner Carriage BiCU connector SBU LEDB connector SBU side connector which is on the scanner carriage BiCU IOB connector 2 Check the white guide plate exposure glass Check the white guide plate attached to the exposure glass If the white guide plate is in an un...

Page 450: ...the main power is turned ON or when the machine returns from energy save mode Scanner Carriage defective BiCU defective IOB defective Harness defective Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON If the SC occurs again do the following steps Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step 1 Reconnect the following connectors Scanner Carriage BiCU connector BiCU IOB connec...

Page 451: ... Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC195 00 D Machine serial number error Comparison of the product identification code in the machine serial number 11 digits The product identification code in the machine serial number 11 digits does not match Re enter the machine serial number ...

Page 452: ...B is firmly connected If necessary connect the connector all the way in 2 If the connector is broken shorted or grounded replace the connector 3 Replace the laser unit IOB defective 1 Update the engine software to the latest version 2 Replace the IOB SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC220 00 D Leading Edge LD synchronization detection error The leading edge LD synchroniza...

Page 453: ...irrors and lenses 3 Reconnect the connectors between LDB and IOB and between IOB and BiCU 4 Replace the laser unit 5 Replace the BiCU 6 Replace the harness between LDB and IOB and between IOB and BiCU 7 Replace the IOB SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC270 00 D GAVD Communication Error The communication is not performed normally between CPU and image writing ASIC Error d...

Page 454: ...ack defective IOB defective Connector defective or disconnected Reconnect the following connectors Then perform a conduction inspection If there is no conduction replace the connector Drum Unit Power Pack connector Power Pack IOB connector Power pack defective Replace the power pack IOB defective Replace the IOB SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC321 00 C Development Unit...

Page 455: ...rum Connection PCB Connect Left PCB connector Connect Left PCB IOB connector Toner density sensor defective Replace the toner density sensor Connect Left PCB defective Replace the Connect Left PCB IOB defective Replace the IOB 6 4 2 SC300 ENGINE IMAGING 2 AROUND THE DRUM SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC396 01 D Drum Motor Error 1 The drum motor is not stabilized within...

Page 456: ...OB SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC396 02 D Drum Motor Error 2 After the drum motor is stabilized the stable OFF signal is detected for 2 seconds consecutively Connector disconnected or defective Drive transmission of the drum motor defective Drum motor defective IOB defective Connector disconnected or defective Reconnect the following connector Then perform a conducti...

Page 457: ...nsity sensor defective Toner motor defective Connect Left PCB defective IOB defective Toner density sensor defective 1 Reconnect the following connectors Toner Density Sensor Drum PCB connector Drum PCB Drum Connection PCB connector Drum Connection PCB Connect Left PCB connector Connect Left PCB IOB connector 2 If the connector is broken shorted or grounded replace the connector 3 Check that the g...

Page 458: ...ear 2 Reconnect the following connectors Toner Density Sensor Drum PCB connector Drum PCB Drum Connection PCB connector Drum Connection PCB Connect Left PCB connector Connect Left PCB IOB connector 3 If the connector is broken shorted or grounded replace the connector 4 Replace the drum unit Connect Left PCB defective Replace the Connect Left PCB IOB defective 1 Update the engine software to the l...

Page 459: ...tive or disconnected Drum PCB defective Connect Left PCB defective IOB defective Connector defective or disconnected Reconnect the following connectors Then perform a conduction inspection If there is no conduction replace the connector Drum Unit Drum Connection PCB connector Drum Connection PCB Connect Left PCB connector Connect Left PCB IOB connector Drum PCB defective Replace the drum PCB Conne...

Page 460: ...ing data and reading date do not match 8 times consecutively Drum PCB defective Connect Left PCB defective IOB defective Drum PCB defective 1 Reconnect the following connectors Drum PCB Drum Connection PCB connector Drum Connection PCB Connect Left PCB connector Connect Left PCB IOB connector 2 If the connector is broken shorted or grounded replace the connector 3 Replace the drum unit Connect Lef...

Page 461: ...e transmission of the paper feed tray lift motor defective Paper feed tray lift motor defective IOB defective Bottom plate of the paper feed tray defective Check the bottom plate of the paper feed tray If the bottom plate does not move smoothly repair or replace the paper feed tray Connector disconnected or defective Reconnect the following connector Then perform a conduction inspection If there i...

Page 462: ... Paper feed tray lift motor defective Main board defective Bottom plate of the paper feed tray defective Check the bottom plate of the paper feed tray If the bottom plate does not move smoothly repair or replace the paper feed tray Connector disconnected or defective Reconnect the following connector Then perform a conduction inspection If there is no conduction replace the connector Paper Feed Tr...

Page 463: ...transmission of the paper feed motor defective Paper feed motor defective Main board defective Connector defective or disconnected Reconnect the following connector Then perform a conduction inspection If there is no conduction replace the connector Paper Feed Tray Lift Motor Main Board connector Drive transmission of the paper feed motor defective Check the gears If any gears are damaged replace ...

Page 464: ... Paper feed tray lift motor defective Main board defective Bottom plate of the paper feed tray defective Check the bottom plate of the paper feed tray If the bottom plate does not move smoothly repair or replace the paper feed tray Connector disconnected or defective Reconnect the following connector Then perform a conduction inspection If there is no conduction replace the connector Paper Feed Tr...

Page 465: ...rive transmission of the paper feed motor defective Paper feed motor defective Main board defective Connector defective or disconnected Reconnect the following connector Then perform a conduction inspection If there is no conduction replace the connector Paper Feed Motor Main Board connector Drive transmission of the paper feed motor defective Check the gears If any gears are damaged replace them ...

Page 466: ... Paper feed tray lift motor defective Main board defective Bottom plate of the paper feed tray defective Check the bottom plate of the paper feed tray If the bottom plate does not move smoothly repair or replace the paper feed tray Connector disconnected or defective Reconnect the following connector Then perform a conduction inspection If there is no conduction replace the connector Paper Feed Tr...

Page 467: ...rive transmission of the paper feed motor defective Paper feed motor defective Main board defective Connector defective or disconnected Reconnect the following connector Then perform a conduction inspection If there is no conduction replace the connector Paper Feed Motor Main Board connector Drive transmission of the paper feed motor defective Check the gears If any gears are damaged replace them ...

Page 468: ... Paper feed tray lift motor defective Main board defective Bottom plate of the paper feed tray defective Check the bottom plate of the paper feed tray If the bottom plate does not move smoothly repair or replace the paper feed tray Connector disconnected or defective Reconnect the following connector Then perform a conduction inspection If there is no conduction replace the connector Paper Feed Tr...

Page 469: ...rive transmission of the paper feed motor defective Paper feed motor defective Main board defective Connector defective or disconnected Reconnect the following connector Then perform a conduction inspection If there is no conduction replace the connector Paper Feed Motor Main Board connector Drive transmission of the paper feed motor defective Check the gears If any gears are damaged replace them ...

Page 470: ...defective 1 Update the engine software to the latest version 2 Replace the IOB SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC520 02 D Main Motor Error 2 After the main motor is stabilized the stable OFF signal is detected for 2 seconds consecutively Main motor defective IOB defective Main motor defective 1 Check if the gears rotate smoothly If any gears are damaged replace them 2 Re...

Page 471: ... defective Fusing pressure release motor defective Connect Left PCB defective IOB defective Connector disconnected or defective Reconnect the following connectors Then perform a conduction inspection If there is no conduction replace the connector Fusing Pressure Release Motor Connect Left PCB connector Connect Left PCB IOB connector Drive transmission of the fusing pressure release motor defectiv...

Page 472: ...ure release motor defective Connect Left PCB defective IOB defective Connector defective or disconnected Reconnect the following connectors Then perform a conduction inspection If there is no conduction replace the connector Fusing Pressure Release Motor Connect Left PCB connector Connect Left PCB IOB connector Drive transmission of the fusing pressure release motor defective Check the gears If an...

Page 473: ... Fusing thermistor connection PCB defective IOB defective Fusing thermistor center defective Fusing thermostat defective PSU defective Connector pin defective If the I F connector pins of the fuser unit and the main unit are deformed owing to foreign materials replace the connectors or the units including the connectors Triac defective Disconnect the power cord and check that the resistance betwee...

Page 474: ... is broken shorted or grounded replace the connector 4 Replace the fusing unit Fusing thermistor connection PCB defective Replace the fusing thermistor connection PCB IOB defective 1 Update the engine software to the latest version 2 Replace the IOB Fusing thermistor center defective Replace the fusing unit Fusing thermostat defective 1 Reconnect the following connector Fusing Unit PSU connector 2...

Page 475: ... the temperature of 155 degrees C or less Connector pin defective Triac defective Fusing thermistor defective IOB defective Connector pin defective If the I F connector pins of the fuser unit and the main unit are deformed owing to foreign materials replace the connectors or the units including the connectors Triac defective Disconnect the power cord and check that the resistance between terminals...

Page 476: ...after the machine starts warming up Connector pin defective Triac defective Fusing unit defective Fusing thermistor connection PCB defective IOB defective PSU defective Fusing lamp defective The fusing thermistor center detects the temperature that exceeds 235 degrees C The fusing thermistor center detects the temperature that exceeds 195 degrees C in a heater off state after the fusing thermistor...

Page 477: ...ors Triac defective Disconnect the power cord and check that the resistance between terminals T1 and T2 of the triac TRA31 and triac TRA41 on the PSU are several Mega Ohms and not shorted If failed replace the PSU Fusing unit defective 1 Check that no paper jam is present 2 Reconnect the following connectors Fusing Unit Fusing Thermistor Connection PCB connector Fusing Thermistor Connection PCB IO...

Page 478: ...ion SC551 00 D Fusing Thermistor End Disconnected Error Input from fusing thermistor end is 1019 or more A D value continuously for 4 seconds Connector defective or disconnected Connector pin defective Triac defective Fusing thermistor defective Fusing thermistor connection PCB defective IOB defective Connector defective or disconnected Reconnect the following connectors Fusing Thermistor Fusing T...

Page 479: ...using unit Fusing thermistor connection PCB defective Replace the fusing thermistor connection PCB IOB defective Replace the IOB SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC553 00 D Fusing Thermistor End High Temperature The fusing thermistor end detects the temperature that exceeds 245 degrees C The fusing thermistor end detects the temperature that exceeds 195 degrees C in a hea...

Page 480: ...t the resistance between terminals T1 and T2 of the triac TRA31 and triac TRA41 on the PSU are several Mega Ohms and not shorted If failed replace the PSU Fusing thermistor defective Replace the fusing unit IOB defective Replace the IOB SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC581 00 C Temperature Sensor Disconnected Error The average of the output from the temperature sensor i...

Page 481: ...software to the latest version 2 Replace the IOB SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC582 00 C Temperature Sensor Shorted Error The average of the output from the temperature sensor is 31 or less for 5 seconds Temperature sensor defective IOB defective Temperature sensor defective 1 Reconnect the following connector Temperature Sensor IOB connector 2 If the connector is bro...

Page 482: ...Zero Cross Signal Error While fusing lamp ON OFF control is performed the zero cross signal is not input within 2 seconds consecutively Fusing unit defective PSU defective IOB defective Fusing unit defective 1 Reconnect the following connectors PSU IOB connector 2 If the connector is broken shorted or grounded replace the connector PSU defective Replace the PSU IOB defective Replace the IOB ...

Page 483: ...or disconnected or defective Main board defective IOB defective Paper feed tray 2 defective Check the connection between the main machine and paper feed tray 2 Connector disconnected or defective Reconnect the following connector IOB Main Board connector Replace the main board Replace the IOB SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC622 02 D Paper Feed Unit Communication Error ...

Page 484: ...2 Replace the IOB SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC622 03 D Paper Feed Unit Communication Error Tray 4 A communication error is detected from the paper feed unit 4 10 times consecutively Paper feed tray 4 defective Main board defective IOB defective Paper feed tray 4 defective Check the connection between the main machine and paper feed tray 4 Main board defective 1 Rec...

Page 485: ...ve 1 Reconnect the following connector IOB Main Board connector 2 If the connector is broken shorted or grounded replace the connector 3 Replace the main board IOB defective 1 Update the engine software to the latest version 2 Replace the IOB SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC636 01 D IC Card error Expanded authentication module error Issued when expanded authentication ...

Page 486: ...SP Mode set SP5 401 160 to 0 In the SSP Mode set SP5 401 161 to 0 Replace the NVRAM SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC665 02 D BiCU IOB Connection Error FFC connection error connector disconnected between BiCU and IOB is detected during the startup operation of the engine when the main power is turned on or when the machine returns from energy save mode FFC defective or ...

Page 487: ...on Major Cause Solution SC667 01 D Master Device Operating Mode Setting Error The mode setting error of CPU is detected during the startup operation of the engine when the main power is turned on or when the machine returns from energy save mode BiCU defective 1 Turn the main power OFF ON 2 Replace the BiCU SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC667 20 D Breit Operating Mode ...

Page 488: ... 4 Replace the BiCU 5 Replace the IOB SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC669 EEPROM Communication Error SC669 01 D EEPROM OPEN ID error SC669 02 D EEPROM OPEN Channel error SC669 03 D EEPROM OPEN Device error SC669 04 D EEPROM OPEN Communication abort error SC669 05 D EEPROM OPEN Communication timeout error SC669 06 D EEPROM OPEN Operation stopped error SC669 07 D EEPROM ...

Page 489: ...PROM Data read Device error SC669 22 D EEPROM Data read Communication abort error SC669 23 D EEPROM Data read Communication timeout error SC669 24 D EEPROM Data read Operation stopped error SC669 25 D EEPROM Data read Buffer full SC669 26 D EEPROM Data read No error code SC669 36 D Verification error SC669 37 D Error Detection The toner density sensor cannot be recovered after retrying N 1 times f...

Page 490: ...SC is issued during printing or during receiving fax documents replace the controller board If the SC is issued during copying check the ARDF and IOB connection SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC689 01 D EEPROM Communication Error 1 No response from the device in reading writing for 5 seconds or more and this problem is repeated 5 times The reading data of 2 locations do...

Page 491: ...olution SC690 00 C EEPROM Data Error Reading data from EEPROM is abnormal EEPROM on the controller board defective 1 Turn the main power OFF and wait for 5 seconds Then turn the main power ON 2 Replace the IOB 3 If the EEPROM on the controller board is damaged replace the EEPROM SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC691 00 D Image Processing Error Paper jam J010 J011 J012 J0...

Page 492: ...ontroller board and BiCU Turn the main power OFF then ON SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC670 01 D Engine does not start up during the staring up ENGRDY signal was not asserted when the machine was turned on PCI I F is not linked up when the machine returns from energy saver mode EC PC SC response was not received within specified time from power on Writing to Rapi driv...

Page 493: ...led Board installed incorrectly Controller board defective Operation panel connector loose broken or defective Controller late 1 Turn the main power OFF ON 2 Check the connection of the operation panel 3 Check the connection of the controller board 4 Replace the controller board SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC672 10 D Controller start up error After the machine was po...

Page 494: ...n or defective Controller late 1 Turn the main power OFF ON 2 Check the connection of the operation panel 3 Check the connection of the controller board 4 Replace the controller board SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC672 12 D Controller start up error Communication with controller was interrupted after a normal startup Controller stalled Board installed incorrectly Cont...

Page 495: ...ler board defective Operation panel connector loose broken or defective Controller late 1 Turn the main power OFF ON 2 Check the connection of the operation panel 3 Check the connection of the controller board 4 Replace the controller board SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution 673 10 D Operation panel Flair communication error Smart Operation Panel This SC is issued only for ...

Page 496: ... inverter motor one rotation ARDF inverter motor defective ARDF position sensor defective IOB defective ARDF inverter motor defective 1 Disconnect the power cord and wait 5 seconds Reconnect the power cord and then turn the main power ON 2 Confirm that the connector of ARDF inverter motor is firmly connected If necessary connect the connector all the way in 3 Reconnect the following connector ARDF...

Page 497: ...nusually difficult to rotate 2 Check that the ARDF position sensor is not disengaged and is correctly positioned And check that the actuator correctly shields the light 3 Reconnect the following connector ARDF Position Sensor IOB 4 If the connector is broken shorted or grounded replace the connector 5 Replace the ARDF position sensor IOB defective 1 Update the engine software to the latest version...

Page 498: ...nied SC816 04 D Interrupt in kernel communication driver SC816 05 D Preparation for transition to STR failed SC816 07 D Sysarch LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO error SC816 08 D Sysarch LPUX_ENGINE_TIMERCTRL error SC816 09 D Sysarch LPUX_RETURN_FACTOR_STR error SC816 10 to 12 D Sysarch LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO error SC816 13 D open error SC816 14 D Memory address error SC816 15 to 18 D open error SC816 19 D Double op...

Page 499: ...save I O subsystem detected a controller board error non response Error was detected during preparation for transition to STR SC816 99 occurs as a subsystem error except any error from 06 to 96 Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON If the SC occurs again do the following steps Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step 1 Update the following firmware and the ot...

Page 500: ...ic module in SD card Kernel Root filesystem ROM update for controller system Use another booting SD card having a valid digital signature No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC819 00 D Kernel halt error xxxx Detailed error code Due to a control error a RAM overflow occurred during system processing One of the following messages was displayed on the operation panel 0x5032 HAIC P...

Page 501: ...etail code 0x53554D45 Link up error appears on operation panel Turn the main power OFF ON Replace the controller board or the BiCU 0x5355 L2 status time out L2 status register between Engine ASIC and Veena was not reached the target value within 1 sec Engine ASIC during operation was rebooted or shifted to energy saving mode Machine reboots when SC23x SC30x occurs If Engine ASIC is working when re...

Page 502: ...is ended for some reason If an unexpected error occurs at SCS processing end gwint processing also halts this result is judged a kernel stop error by gwinit specification 0x69742064 init died Turn the main power OFF ON 0x766d VM full error Occurs when too much RAM is used during system processing vm_pageout VM is full Turn the main power OFF ON Console string Other error characters on operation pa...

Page 503: ...rom the original data in EEPROM Data in the EEPROM is overwritten for some reason No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC842 00 C Nand Flash updating verification error SCS write error verify error occurred at the Nand Flash module when remote ROM or main ROM was updated Nand Flash defective Turn the main power OFF ON No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC842...

Page 504: ...r of blocks deleted exceeded threshold for Nand Flash Replace the controller board No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC845 Hardware Error Detected when the automatic firmware update SC845 01 D Engine Board SC845 02 D Controller Board SC845 03 D Operation Panel Normal SC845 04 D Operation Panel Smart Panel SC845 05 D FCU When updating the firmware automatically ARFU the firmwa...

Page 505: ...d on No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC854 00 B Bluetooth device disconnected MP 501 601 Only The Bluetooth hardware USB type was disconnected after the machine was turned on The Bluetooth hardware USB type was disconnected after the machine was turned on Never remove Bluetooth USB type after machine starts No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC855 01 B ...

Page 506: ...g an attempt to update the encryption key USB Flash other data corrupted Communication error caused by electrostatic noise Controller board defective Replace the controller board No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC858 01 A Data encryption conversion error HDD Key Setting Error A serious error occurred during an attempt to update the encryption key USB Flash other data corrup...

Page 507: ...tware error such as conversion parameters being invalid Turn the main power OFF ON If the error persists replace the controller board No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC858 31 A Data encryption conversion error Other Error A serious error occurred after data conversion during an attempt to update the encryption key Controller board defective Replace the controller board No T...

Page 508: ... conversion HDD conversion error HDD check error When the data encryption key was updated HDD data was converted but not correctly Image displayed at conversion only this SC is not displayed but SC is displayed after machine is cycled off on HDD conversion was set with the data encryption key update function but the HDD was removed Machine lost power during data encryption key update Electrostatic...

Page 509: ...e HDD No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC859 10 B Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error Data read write command error When the data encryption key was updated HDD data was converted but not correctly Image displayed at conversion only this SC is not displayed but SC is displayed after machine is cycled off on Details Abnormal DMAC return value has been received two...

Page 510: ... 6 Error occurred while writing or checking the label SS_FS_ERROR 7 Failed to repair the filesystem SS_MOUNT_ERROR 8 Failed to mount the filesystem SS_COMMAND_ERROR 9 Drive not responding to command SS_KERNEL_ERROR 10 Internal kernel error SS_SIZE_ERROR 11 Drive size too small SS_NO _PARTITION 12 The specified partition does not exist SS_NO _FILE 13 Device file does not exist Attempted to acquire ...

Page 511: ...ring operation An error occurred in an area that does not belong to a partition such as the disk label area Guide for when to replace the HDD 1 When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short Repeatedly occurs in the same situation At power on etc Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned ON 2 It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ...

Page 512: ...tion panel to become ready HDD access may be consuming time Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more the HDD may be the cause If there is a problem with the HDD HDD related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently Print the SC log data and check them No Type Error Name...

Page 513: ...v SC864 23 Format the HDD Replace the HDD No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC865 00 D HD access error During HDD operation the HDD returned an error The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 bad sector or SC864 CRC error Replace the HDD No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC865 01 D HDD access error During HDD operation the HDD returned an ...

Page 514: ...r Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC865 50 to 73 D HDD time out error The machine does not detect a reply from the HDD during the HDD operation The HDD does not respond to the read write command from the machine Check the harness connections between the controller board and HDD Replace the HDD No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC866 00 B SD card authentication error...

Page 515: ...lication SD card has been removed from the slot mount point of mnt sd1 Turn the main power OFF ON No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC867 02 C SD card removed The SD card was removed while the machine is on An application SD card has been removed from the slot mount point of mnt sd2 Turn the main power OFF ON No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC868 SD ca...

Page 516: ...problem is found insert the SD card and turn the main power ON 3 If an error occurs replace the SD card 4 If the error persists even after replacing the SD card replace the controller board SD card for users 1 In case of a file system error reformat the SD card using the SD Formatter made by Panasonic In case of a device access error 1 Turn the main power OFF and check the SD card insertion status...

Page 517: ...06 B Address Book data error Initialization Failed to generate a file to store information required for LDAP search SC870 07 B Address Book data error Initialization Failed to initialize entries required for machine operation SC870 08 B Address Book data error Machine configuration HDD is present but the space for storing the Address Book is unusable SC870 09 B Address Book data error Machine conf...

Page 518: ...0 32 B Address Book data error Search Failed to obtain data from cache while searching the WS Scanner Address Book SC870 41 B Address Book data error Cache failed to obtain data from cache SC870 50 B Address Book data error On startup Detected abnormality of the Address Book encryption status SC870 51 B Address Book data error Encryption settings Failed to create directory required for conversion ...

Page 519: ...ng SC870 59 B Address Book data error Encryption settings Detected a resource shortage during an attempt to change the encryption setting SC870 60 B Address Book data error Unable to obtain the on off setting for administrator authentication 06A and later When an error related to the Address Book is detected during startup or operation Software bug Inconsistency of Address Book source location mac...

Page 520: ...card or Web Image Monitor restore the address book data To restore from SD card enter the encryption password which is the same as when you enter to backup No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC872 00 B HDD mail reception error An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was turned on HDD defective Power was turned off while the machine used the HDD Format th...

Page 521: ... Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC874 05 D Delete all error Delete data area Read error SC874 06 D Delete all error Delete data area Write error SC874 09 D Delete all error Delete data area No response from HDD SC874 10 D Delete all error Delete data area Error in Kernel SC874 12 D Delete all error Delete data area No designated partition SC874 13 D Delete all error Delete data ar...

Page 522: ...Abnormal SC874 70 D Delete all error Delete data area Unauthorized library MP 501 601 Only SC874 99 D Delete all error Delete data area other errors An error occurred while data was being erased on HDD or NVRAM Error detected in HDD data delete program Error detected in NVRAM data delete program The Delete All option was not set Turn the main power OFF and back on and then execute Erase All Memory...

Page 523: ...Overwrite Security card error The Auto Erase Memory function of the Data Overwrite Security is set to on but it cannot be done Data Overwrite Security option SD card is broken Data Overwrite Security option SD card has been removed If the SD card is broken prepare a new Data Overwrite Security option SD card and replace the NVRAM If the SD card has been removed turn the main power off and reinstal...

Page 524: ...is a problem in the file system of the USB flash memory USB Flash system files corrupted Replace the controller board No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC878 02 D TPM error An error occurred in either TPM or the TPM driver TPM not operating correctly Replace the controller board No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC878 03 D TCSD error An error occurred in...

Page 525: ... ON the main power 2 Replace the controller board No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC899 00 D Software performance error signal reception end Unknown software error occurred Occurs when an internal program behaves abnormally In the case of a hardware defect Replace the hardware In the case of a software error Turn the main power OFF ON Try updating the firmware ...

Page 526: ...11 digits or machine identification code does not match 1 Enter the machine serial number using SP5 811 MachineSerial and then turn the main power ON OFF 2 Attach the NV RAM that was installed previously SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC995 02 D CPM setting error 2 Comparison of machine serial number 11 digits and machine identification code Details Machine serial numbe...

Page 527: ...oller was replaced incorrectly or is malfunctioning Machine serial number 11 digits or machine identification code does not match Replace it with a specified controller SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC995 04 D CPM setting error 4 Comparison of machine serial number 11 digits and machine identification code Machine serial number 11 digits or machine identification code ...

Page 528: ...V RAM data corrupted Data written to unexpected area because of external factor etc The count requested by the SRM on receiving PRT is not completed Replace the NV RAM SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC990 00 D Software operation error Software attempted an unexpected operation Parameter error Internal parameter error Insufficient work memory Operation error caused by ab...

Page 529: ... Major Cause Solution SC992 00 D Undefined SC issued An SC that is not controlled by the system occurred An SC for the previous model was used mistakenly etc Basically a software bug Turn the main power OFF ON SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC997 00 D Application function selection error No response to the predetermined command from SCS to the same application program 4...

Page 530: ...he optional RAM DIMM boards required by the application program Check if the combination of downloaded programs are correct SC No Type Error Name Error Condition Major Cause Solution SC998 00 D Application start error No application was registered to system within a specified time after the main power was turned ON No application starts All applications have been terminated abnormally Application ...

Page 531: ...r SP7 502 001 DATE indicates the date when the jam occurred The 10 latest printer jams are displayed Initial jams are not recorded 6 11 2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES MP 501 601 When a jam occurs the location is displayed on the operation panel SP 5300 5310 An error message appears if a paper misfeed occurs The error message indicates where the misfeed occurs SP7 504 and SP7 505 for ARDF show how m...

Page 532: ...istration sensor 1 B Registration sensor 2 B Duplex sensor 1 Z Duplex sensor 2 Z Rear cover switch C 010 Unit package won t become ready A1 011 Transfer unit not ready A1 012 Drive does not stop A1 013 Duplex printing signal doesn t come A1 014 Fuser unit not ready A1 015 Tray 2 feeding signal doesn t come A1 025 Rear cover open jam A1 026 Upper cover open jam A1 027 More pages than the duplex uni...

Page 533: ...ray 3 Y1 039 Paper feed sensor 2 Late jam When paper feed from Tray 4 Y1 040 Paper feed sensor 2 Late jam When paper feed from Tray 5 Y1 041 Paper feed sensor 2 Lag jam When paper feed from Tray 3 Y1 042 Paper feed sensor 2 Lag jam When paper feed from Tray 4 Y1 043 Paper feed sensor 2 Lag jam When paper feed from Tray 5 Y1 044 Paper feed sensor 3 Late jam When paper feed from Tray 4 Y2 045 Paper ...

Page 534: ...per feed from Tray 4 B 053 Registration sensor 1 Late jam When paper feed from Tray 5 B 054 Registration sensor 1 Lag jam When paper feed from Tray 2 B 055 Registration sensor 1 Lag jam When paper feed from Tray 3 B 056 Registration sensor 1 Lag jam When paper feed from Tray 4 B 057 Registration sensor 1 Lag jam When paper feed from Tray 5 B 058 Registration sensor 2 Late jam When paper feed from ...

Page 535: ... When paper feed from Tray 2 B 067 Registration sensor 2 Lag jam When paper feed from Tray 3 B 068 Registration sensor 2 Lag jam When paper feed from Tray 4 B 069 Registration sensor 2 Lag jam When paper feed from Tray 5 B 70 Registration sensor 2 Lag jam When paper feed from duplex unit B 071 Registration sensor 2 Lag jam When paper feed from bypass tray unit B 072 Paper exit full sensor Late jam...

Page 536: ...g jam When paper feed from Tray 2 C 081 Paper exit full sensor Lag jam When paper feed from Tray 3 C 082 Paper exit full sensor Lag jam When paper feed from Tray 4 C 083 Paper exit full sensor Lag jam When paper feed from Tray 5 C 084 Paper exit full sensor Lag jam When paper feed from duplex unit C 085 Paper exit full sensor Lag jam When paper feed from bypass tray unit C 086 Duplex sensor 1 Late...

Page 537: ...ray 2 Z 094 Duplex sensor 2 Late jam When paper feed from Tray 3 Z 095 Duplex sensor 2 Late jam When paper feed from Tray 4 Z 096 Duplex sensor 2 Late jam When paper feed from Tray 5 Z 097 Duplex sensor 2 Late jam When paper feed from bypass tray unit Z 098 Duplex sensor 2 Lag jam When paper feed from duplex unit B 099 Tray 2 No feed Y1 100 Tray 3 No feed Y2 101 Tray 4 No feed Y3 102 Tray 5 No fee...

Page 538: ...OS ARDF original sensor PFPS1 Paper end sensor 1 1 ARRS ARDF registration sensor PFPS2 Paper end sensor 2 1 ARTS ARDF original timing sensor PFPS3 Paper end sensor 3 1 BPES Bypass paper end sensor PFPS4 Paper end sensor 4 1 DUS1 Duplex sensor 1 PFS Paper exit full sensor DUS2 Duplex sensor 2 PS1 Paper end sensor 1 ...

Page 539: ... sensor 1 1 RS1 Registration sensor 1 PFFS2 Paper feed sensor 2 1 RS2 Registration sensor 2 PFFS3 Paper feed sensor 3 1 RS3 Registration sensor 3 PFFS4 Paper feed sensor 4 1 1 Optional paper feed unit SP 5300 5310 Abbreviation Name Abbreviation Name BPES Bypass paper end sensor PFPS1 Paper end sensor 1 1 DUS1 Duplex sensor 1 PFPS2 Paper end sensor 2 1 ...

Page 540: ...r PFFS2 Paper feed sensor 2 1 PLS Paper feed tray limit sensor PFFS3 Paper feed sensor 3 1 PS1 Paper end sensor 1 PFFS4 Paper feed sensor 4 1 PS2 Paper end sensor 2 PFLS1 Paper feed tray limit sensor 1 1 RS1 Registration sensor 1 PFLS2 Paper feed tray limit sensor 2 1 RS2 Registration sensor 2 PFLS3 Paper feed tray limit sensor 3 1 RS3 Registration sensor 3 PFLS4 Paper feed tray limit sensor 4 1 1...

Page 541: ... 1280 036 24H 8 1 2 x14 LG LEF 3556 2159 037 25H 8 1 2 x13 Foolscape LEF 3302 2159 038 26H 8 1 2 x11 LT LEF 2794 2159 039 27H 8 1 4 x14 LEF 3556 2096 040 28H 8 1 4 x13 Folio LEF 3302 2096 041 29H 8 x13 F GL LEF 3302 2032 043 2BH 8 x10 UK LEF 2540 2032 044 2CH 5 1 2 x8 1 2 HLT LEF 2159 1397 045 2DH 7 1 4 x10 1 2 Exective LEF 2667 1842 067 43H 16K LEF 2670 1950 072 48H 8 1 2 x13 2 5 Oficio LEF 3404 ...

Page 542: ...Jam Detection D255 D256 M281 M282 6 104 SM Size Code Paper Size Name Orientation Main Scan Length Sub Scan Length 085 55H DL Envelope LEF 2200 1100 134 86H A5 SEF 1480 2100 ...

Page 543: ...n the paper feed tray are set properly They must tightly fit to the paper without space Toner sticking to the right side area on the second side of the paper Symptom Toner sticking to the right side area A on the second side of the paper The arrow indicates the paper feed direction The toner sticking image Solution 1 Open the front cover MP 501 601 Push the button A and open the front cover B ...

Page 544: ...Troubleshooting Guide D255 D256 M281 M282 6 106 SM SP 5300 5310 Open the upper cover A and then open the front cover B 2 Pull out the PCDU A ...

Page 545: ... you want to change the paper type 5 Change the paper type setting to thicker in Paper Thickness SP 5300 5310 1 Press the Menu key on the control panel 2 Select Paper Input Press OK 3 Select the tray from Tray Paper Size Tray 1 to Tray Paper Size Tray 5 for which you want to change the paper type Press OK 4 Change the paper type setting to thicker Press OK The setting is complete when specifying t...

Page 546: ...ness SP 5300 5310 1 Press the Menu key on the control panel 2 Select Paper Input Press OK 3 Select the tray from Tray Paper Size Tray 1 to Tray Paper Size Tray 5 for which you want to change the paper type Press OK 4 Change the paper type setting to thicker Press OK The setting is complete when specifying the following types of paper Thin Paper Plain Paper Plain Paper 2 Middle Thick Thick Paper 1 ...

Page 547: ...ol By Pass Tray You can also enable the scattered toner prevention function with the UP mode MP 501 601 User Tools Machine Features Scattered Toner Image Prevention SP 5300 5310 Menu Maintenance Quality Maintenance Scattered Toner Prevention Related information When you change the paper type setting or enable the scattered toner prevention function the transfer current fusing temperature and copy ...

Page 548: ...ntion function is disabled Thin Paper 60 60 15 15 50 52 Plain Paper 1 25 25 5 5 50 52 Plain Paper 2 0 0 0 0 50 52 Middle Thick 0 0 25 25 50 52 Thick Paper 1 100 100 5 5 35 35 Thick Paper 2 100 100 10 10 35 35 Thick Paper 3 100 100 15 15 35 35 2 When the scattered toner prevention function is enabled Plain Paper 1 45 45 5 5 50 52 Plain Paper 2 45 45 0 0 50 52 Middle Thick 45 45 25 25 50 52 ...

Page 549: ...er prevention function is enabled Plain Paper 1 50 50 5 5 60 62 Plain Paper 2 50 50 0 0 60 62 Middle Thick 50 50 25 25 60 62 Black or White spots repeat at 30mm or 96mm intervals Symptom White spots Black spots appear on the printouts in 96mm pitch Black spots appear on the printouts in 30mm pitch Cause Adhesives contained in label paper adhere to the drum and then to the charge roller Solution 1 ...

Page 550: ...registration roller Symptom The paper jam such as J031 J054 J057 J069 occur in the paper path between Tray 1 and around the registration Solution Clean the registration sensor 1 and opposing part 1 Open the front cover MP 501 601 Push the button A and open the front cover B SP 5300 5310 Open the upper cover A and then open the front cover B ...

Page 551: ...6 113 D255 D256 M281 M282 Troubleshooting 2 Pull out the PCDU A 3 Clean the registration sensor 1 A with a damp cloth from the backside of the PCDU B 4 Clean the opposing part A of the registration sensor 1 with the damp cloth ...

Page 552: ... occur after removing the paper which was jammed between fusing section and registration section This is because the registration filler has got under the registration roller when removing the jammed paper Solution 1 Open the front cover MP 501 601 Push the button A and open the front cover B SP 5300 5310 Open the upper cover A and then open the front cover B ...

Page 553: ...Troubleshooting Guide SM 6 115 D255 D256 M281 M282 Troubleshooting 2 Pull out the PCDU A 3 Check whether the registration filler A moves smoothly ...

Page 554: ... refresh mode when the following image quality failure occur Background stains appear as bands perpendicular to the paper feed direction Vertical white streaks with about 1mm width in the form of a dotted line appear 15mm to the left of the paper center Drum refresh procedure It takes approximately 3 minutes to refresh the drum If sheets of paper are loaded in the bypass tray first remove them and...

Page 555: ...ircumference of certain components The following diagram shows the possible symptoms black or white dots at regular intervals A Paper feed direction B Problems at regular intervals 29 9 mm intervals Charge roller 36 8 mm intervals Registration roller 44 9 mm intervals Development roller 61 2 mm intervals Transfer roller 94 2 mm intervals Drum 94 2 mm intervals Pressure roller 109 9 mm intervals Ho...

Page 556: ...up error is displayed Symptom SC670 engine start up error is displayed Cause The engine board resets at an unexpected timing and does not start up again Solution If the symptom occurs use the following flow chart to determine the cause and decide the best course of action ...

Page 557: ...ates with the controller via a USB cable and IPU SC672 is triggered when the panel cannot communicate with the controller Cause Possible causes of SC672 include USB communication path failure USB cable IPU Controller boot up errors and or operation panel boot up errors due to an abnormal break in operations of the controller Possible causes of operation panel cannot light include USB communication...

Page 558: ... panel LED on controller blinks once every second Controller LEDs on controller blink constantly Flowchart to determine which parts to replace when no display on Operation Panel Parts How to determine the cause USB cable LED on controller blinks once every second Operation Panel LED on controller blinks once every second BiCU Fuse 1 on the BiCU Controller LED on controller does not blink Rev 02 09...

Page 559: ...STCODE LED 8 and BIOS LED blinking once every second No Note LED For CPU POSTCODE 8 and BIOS LED blink when the CPU is operating normally POSTCODE 8 and BIOS LED are lit or off when there is a problem with the CPU Confirmation procedure 1 Remove the FCU unit Fax unit 2 Remove the I F slot 3 Turn ON the machine and check the LED from the rear right side of the machine Rev 02 09 2017 ...

Page 560: ...t or off when there is a problem with the CPU BIOS LED LED is lit when the BIOS is running LED blinks when the OS is running C Reconnecting and replacing the USB cable Reconnect the USB cable as shown below USB connector at the operation panel When connecting the cable hold the molded part of the cable as shown below so as not to apply excessive force on the connector part Applying excessive force...

Page 561: ...nce for replacing the USB cable Refer to 4 Replacement and Adjustment Operation Panel MP 501 601 D CMOS clear procedure Turn the machine power OFF 1 Turn Dip switch 1 3 ON for 10 seconds 2 Turn Dip switch 1 3 OFF 3 Turn the machine power ON Dip switches location on the controller board Rev 02 09 2017 ...

Page 562: ...5 D256 M281 M282 6 124 SM E Fuse on the BiCU Check the Fuse 1 on the BiCU FU1 on the BiCU F For replacing the operation panel or the USB cable Refer to 4 Replacement and Adjustment Operation Panel MP 501 601 p281 Rev 02 09 2017 ...

Page 563: ...DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 564: ......

Page 565: ...Product Overview SM 7 1 D255 D256 M281 M282 Detailed Descriptions 7 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 7 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW 7 1 1 MP 501 601 COMPONENT LAYOUT PAPER PATH ...

Page 566: ...2 7 2 SM No Name No Name 1 Paper feed tray 8 Drum unit 2 Bypass tray unit 9 Transfer unit 3 Transportation section 10 Fusing unit 4 Scanner unit 11 Paper exit unit 5 Laser unit 12 Duplex unit 6 Development unit 13 ARDF 7 Toner cartridge ...

Page 567: ...Layout Paper Path No Name No Name 1 Paper feed tray 9 Charge roller 2 Paper feed unit 10 Drum unit 3 Transportation section 11 Transfer unit 4 Bypass tray 12 Paper exit tray 5 Bypass tray unit 13 Paper exit unit 6 Toner cartridge 14 Fusing unit 7 Development unit 15 Duplex unit 8 Laser unit ...

Page 568: ... ARDF original timing sensor 14 Paper feed tray size switch 3 ARDF open close sensor 15 Main power switch PCB 4 ARDF original sensor 16 Paper feed tray limit sensor 5 ARDF position sensor 17 Bypass paper end sensor 6 Fusing thermistor 2 Center 18 Registration sensor 2 7 Fusing thermistor 1 End 19 Duplex sensor 2 8 Fusing sensor 20 Waste toner full sensor ...

Page 569: ...5 D256 M281 M282 Detailed Descriptions No Name No Name 9 Registration sensor 1 21 Paper end sensor 1 10 Paper exit full sensor 22 Paper end sensor 2 11 Duplex sensor 1 23 Rear cover switch 12 Envelope sensor 24 Scanner HP sensor ...

Page 570: ... feed tray size switch 3 Fusing thermistor 1 End 13 Duplex sensor 2 4 Fusing thermistor 2 Center 14 Registration sensor 2 5 Fusing sensor 15 Paper end sensor 2 6 Paper exit full sensor 16 Paper end sensor 1 7 Duplex sensor 1 17 Registration sensor 1 8 Envelope sensor 18 Bypass paper end sensor 9 Interlock switch 19 Waste toner full sensor 10 Paper feed tray limit sensor ...

Page 571: ...Name 1 ARDF paper transport motor 9 Main motor 2 ARDF paper feed motor 10 Paper feed tray lift motor 3 ARDF inverter motor 11 PSU fan 4 Polygon motor 12 Fusing pressure release motor 5 Toner supply motor 13 Development fan 6 Scanner motor 14 Paper exit motor 7 Drum motor 15 Laser fan 8 Controller box fan ...

Page 572: ... 5300 5310 Drive unit Fans No Name No Name 1 Polygon motor 7 Paper feed tray lift motor 2 Laser fan 8 PSU fan 3 Paper exit motor 9 Fusing pressure release motor 4 Drum motor 10 Development fan 5 Controller box fan 11 Toner supply motor 6 Main motor ...

Page 573: ...s No Name No Name 1 LDB 11 IOB 2 Toner cartridge connection PCB 12 Thermostat connection PCB 3 Drum PCB 13 Power pack 4 Drum heater PCB Asia Only 14 Drum connection PCB 5 Toner cartridge PCB 15 Connect Left PCB 6 Toner density sensor PCB 16 OPU board 7 Controller board 17 Thermistor connection PCB ...

Page 574: ...Product Overview D255 D256 M281 M282 7 10 SM No Name No Name 8 BiCU 18 LED PCB 9 PSU 19 SBU 10 Fax board ...

Page 575: ...ctrical Components No Name No Name 1 LDB 9 OPU Board 2 Connect Left PCB 10 Sensor PCB 3 Thermostat connection PCB 11 Power pack 4 IOB 12 Drum connection PCB 5 Controller board 13 Toner cartridge PCB 6 BiCU 14 Drum PCB 7 PSU 15 Toner cartridge connection PCB 8 Thermistor connection PCB ...

Page 576: ...rs No Name No Name 1 Fusing lamps 8 Duplex clutch 2 Fusing thermostat 1 End 9 Registration clutch 3 Fusing thermostat 2 Center 10 Paper feed clutch 4 Quenching lamp 11 Transport clutch 5 Speaker 12 Bypass solenoid 6 HDD 13 Inverter solenoid 7 Development clutch ...

Page 577: ...e 1 Fusing thermostat 1 End 8 Transport clutch 2 Fusing thermostat 2 Center 9 Bypass solenoid 3 Fusing lamp 1 10 Duplex clutch 4 Fusing lamp 2 11 Control panel 5 Development clutch 12 Inverter solenoid 6 Registration clutch 13 Drum heater PCB Asia and Chinese Only 7 Paper feed clutch 14 Quenching lamp ...

Page 578: ...ical signal If the ARDF is used the scanner unit stops at the position of the ARDF exposure glass Then the machine sequentially scans each line of the image on the original in synchronization with the movement of the original in the sub scan direction as it is fed by the ARDF No Name No Name 1 CCD 5 Original size indicator plate 2 Carriage 6 Exposure glass for ARDF 3 Scanner frame 7 Lens 4 Exposur...

Page 579: ...ser beam from the laser unit The polygon motor rotates to reflect the laser beam over the drum Various lenses and mirrors are housed in the laser unit to adjust the diameter of the laser beam and focus it on the drum surface No Name No Name 1 Polygon motor 4 Unit base 2 f theta main lens 5 Unit cover 3 Dust shield glass 6 Mirror ...

Page 580: ...ent blade and the development agitators that agitate the toner in the development unit The toner sensor checks whether or not toner remains in the development unit No Name No Name 1 Development roller 6 Toner supply roller 2 Development blade 7 Toner agitator 3 Development agitator A 8 Toner cartridge 4 Development agitator B 9 Development blade 5 Development case ...

Page 581: ...on for formation of residual image by the laser beam After transfer is complete toner remaining on the drum surface is removed with the cleaning blade and is sent to the waste toner bottle with the drum coil The quenching lamp consists of LEDs and removes residual charge on the drum before main charging for the next image No Name No Name 1 Drum 3 Cleaning roller for charge roller 2 Charge roller 4...

Page 582: ... Unit D255 D256 M281 M282 7 18 SM 7 5 2 CLEANING UNIT No Name No Name 1 Drum 5 Scraper 2 Cleaning blade 6 Drum frame 3 Cleaning roller 7 Waste toner removal coil drum coil 4 Control roller 8 Quenching lamp ...

Page 583: ...m separation claws A high voltage generated by the power pack is applied to the transfer roller for transfer charging Paper after transfer is separated from the drum by applying the separation charge that is output from the power pack to the discharge plate No Name No Name 1 Transfer guide plate 4 Discharge plate 2 Drum 5 Drum heater Asia Only 3 Transfer roller ...

Page 584: ...he fusing pressure spring The surface temperature of the hot roller is detected by the fusing thermistor and controlled by the controller board If the fusing unit reaches extremely high temperature the power line will be shut off and the fusing lamp is forced to turn off No Name No Name 1 Hot roller 7 Actuator fusing sensor 2 Fusing lamps 8 Fusing exit roller 3 Fusing thermostat 9 Fusing exit pull...

Page 585: ...Fusing Unit SM 7 21 D255 D256 M281 M282 Detailed Descriptions ...

Page 586: ...using unit to the paper exit tray and the transport path which sends the paper to the duplex unit when duplex printing No Name No Name 1 Upper paper exit pulley 5 Lower paper exit pulley 2 Upper paper exit roller 6 MP 501 601 Paper exit cover SP 5300 5310 Upper cover 3 Actuator paper tray full sensor 7 Duplex feed pulley 4 Lower paper exit roller ...

Page 587: ...Paper Exit Unit SM 7 23 D255 D256 M281 M282 Detailed Descriptions ...

Page 588: ...of the transport path which sends the paper from the paper exit unit to the transportation section when duplex printing No Name No Name 1 Duplex rollers 5 Duplex base 2 Duplex idle rollers 6 Duplex lower guide 3 Actuator duplex sensor 1 7 Feed upper guide 4 Actuator duplex sensor 2 ...

Page 589: ...ction The cassette can contain 500 sheets The sheet from the cassette is pulled out by rotation of the pickup roller and sent to the transportation section by rotation of the paper feed roller The separation roller prevents multiple feeding No Name No Name 1 Paper feed roller 7 Bottom plate 2 Pickup roller 8 Paper width guide 3 Feed roller holder 9 Paper length guide 4 Separation roller 10 Cassett...

Page 590: ...Paper Feed Unit D255 D256 M281 M282 7 26 SM ...

Page 591: ...eeding from the bypass tray is performed by the rotation of the bypass paper feed roller The bypass separation pad prevents paper from multiple feeding No Name No Name 1 Bypass paper feed roller 5 Bypass frame 2 Bypass separation pad 6 Bypass paper width guide 3 Bypass bottom plate 7 Actuator bypass paper end sensor 4 Bypass tray ...

Page 592: ...laced on the original tray is conveyed to the original feed section The original is fed by the rotation of the ARDF pickup pulley and the ARDF paper feed roller No Name No Name 1 ARDF pickup roller 5 Pre separation pad 2 ARDF paper feed roller 6 Actuator ARDF original sensor 3 ARDF feed roller holder 7 Original tray 4 ARDF separation pad 8 Actuator ARDF original timing sensor ...

Page 593: ...ARDF MP 501 601 Only SM 7 29 D255 D256 M281 M282 Detailed Descriptions ...

Page 594: ...original that has completed scanning is ejected to the original exit table by the exit roller The original is transported temporarily to the original exit table and transported again to the original transport section by the junction roller No Name No Name 1 Actuator ARDF registration sensor 8 Junction guide 2 ARDF registration roller 9 Junction roller 3 ARDF registration pulley 10 Junction pulley ...

Page 595: ...ARDF MP 501 601 Only SM 7 31 D255 D256 M281 M282 Detailed Descriptions ...

Page 596: ...y saved will be different For example if the timers are all set to 240 min the grey area will disappear and no energy is saved before 240 min expires Timer Settings The user can set these timers in the following menu MP 501 601 User Tools System settings Timer Settings SP 5300 5310 System Low Power Mode Timer Auto off timer 1 240 min Off Sleep Mode Default setting 1 min Return to Stand by Mode Rec...

Page 597: ...ave Effectiveness SP 8 941 Machine Status keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in each mode SP8 941 001 Operating mode SP 8 941 002 Standby mode SP 8 941 003 Panel off mode Not used in this model SP 8 941 004 Low power mode Not used in this model SP 8 941 005 Sleep mode With this data and the power consumption values from the specifications we can estimate the amount of ene...

Page 598: ...ec W Power consumption KWH 1000 Operating 001 Operating Time 21089 0 21386 0 4 95 898 4 45 Stand by Ready 002 Standby Time 306163 0 308046 0 31 38 179 5 62 Energy save Panel off 003 Energy Save Time 74000 75111 0 18 52 148 09 2 74 Low power 004 Low Power Time 148000 150333 38 88 111 4 32 Sleep 005 Off Mode Time 508776 0 520377 0 193 35 1 8 0 35 Total 17 47 ...

Page 599: ...D255 D256 M281 M282 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES ...

Page 600: ......

Page 601: ...1 3 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES 1 19 1 3 1 PAPER FEED 1 19 1 4 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES 1 21 1 4 1 PRINTER DRIVERS 1 21 Windows 1 21 Mac OS Environment 1 23 UNIX Environment 1 23 SAP R 3 Environment Device Type Barcode OCR Package 1 23 1 4 2 SCANNER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS 1 24 1 5 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 1 25 1 5 1 PAPER FEED UNIT PB1100 1 25 2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES 2 1 2 1 MAINTENANCE TABLES 2 1 2 1 1 PREV...

Page 602: ...1 3 5 MAIN SP TABLES 4 3 13 3 5 1 SP4 XXX SCANNER 3 13 3 6 MAIN SP TABLES 5 ENGINE 3 19 3 6 1 SP5 XXX MODE 3 19 3 7 MAIN SP TABLES 5 CONTROLLER 3 22 3 7 1 SP5 XXX MODE 3 22 3 8 MAIN SP TABLES 6 MP 501 601 ONLY 3 67 3 8 1 SP6 XXX PERIPHERALS 3 67 3 9 MAIN SP TABLES 7 ENGINE 3 68 3 9 1 SP7 XXX DATA LOG 3 68 3 10 MAIN SP TABLES 7 CONTROLLER 3 71 3 10 1SP7 XXX DATA LOG 3 71 3 11MAIN SP TABLES 8 3 96 3...

Page 603: ...escription 4 6 4 1 4 PJL USTATUS 4 7 Printer Bit Switch description 4 7 4 2 SCANNER FEATURES MP 501 601 ONLY 4 10 4 2 1 DISPLAY SETTINGS OF RECENTLY USED SCAN DESTINATION 4 10 4 2 2 THE SETTING OF SMTP AUTHENTICATION IN SCAN TO EMAIL 4 11 Typical example 4 11 4 2 3 THE QUALIFICATION SWITCHING OF SCAN TO FOLDER 4 13 4 3 MANAGEMENT FEATURES 4 15 4 3 1 HOW TO DISABLE THE DOCUMENT SERVER FUNCTION 4 15...

Page 604: ......

Page 605: ...APPENDIX SPECIFICATIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 606: ......

Page 607: ...gh CCD Printing process Laser beam scanning and electro photographic printing Development Monocomponent jumping development system Fusing System Roller fusing system Recommended Paper Size Tray 1 Standard Tray A4 SEF A5 SEF LEF A6 SEF B5 SEF B6 SEF 8 5 14 LG SEF 8 5 13 Foolscap SEF 8 5 11 LT SEF 8 25 14 Government LG SEF 8 25 13 Folio SEF 8 13 F GL SEF 8 10 Eng Quatro SEF 7 25 10 5 Executive SEF 5...

Page 608: ...mm 6 83 inch 356 0 mm 14 0 inch Recommended Paper Size Bypass Tray A4 SEF A5 SEF LEF A6 SEF B5 SEF B6 SEF 8 5 14 LG SEF 8 5 13 Foolscap SEF 8 5 11 LT SEF 8 25 14 Government LG SEF 8 25 13 Folio SEF 8 13 F GL SEF 8 10 Eng Quatro SEF 7 25 10 5 Executive SEF 5 5 8 5 Half Letter SEF Com10 SEF Monarch SEF C5 SEF C6 SEF DL Env SEF 16K SEF 8 5 13 4 SEF Custom Size Paper Width 70 0 mm 2 76 inch 216 0 mm 8...

Page 609: ...velope Thickness Plain Paper 1 Plain Paper 2 Middle Thick Thick Paper 1 Thick Paper 2 Thick Paper 3 Bypass Tray Paper Type Plain Paper Not Displayed as Paper Type Recycle Paper Color Paper Special Paper Letterhead Preprinted Paper Bond Paper OHP Label Envelope Thickness Thin Paper Plain Paper 1 Plain Paper 2 Middle Thick Thick Paper 1 Thick Paper 2 Thick Paper 3 Paper Weight Tray 1 Standard Tray 6...

Page 610: ...stem consists of the main unit four optional paper feed units and wireless LAN board Noise emission Sound Power Level Complete System MP 501 Stand by 30 4 dB A Printing 73 3 dB A MP 601 Stand by 30 3 dB A Printing 74 7 dB A The complete system consists of the main unit four optional paper feed units and caster table Target Monthly ACV MP 501 5 0K MP 601 6 5K Reliability Max Monthly CV 5 years 15K ...

Page 611: ...200 141 100 93 71 50 Zoom From 25 to 400 in 1 step Number of Copy Reservations 8 jobs Image Density Auto Density Selection Manual 9 levels Copy Mode Text Text Photo Photo Pale Generation Copy Default Text Paper Selection Tray 1 Tray 2 optional paper feed tray Tray 3 optional paper feed tray Tray 4 optional paper feed tray Tray 5 optional paper feed tray Bypass Tray Default Tray 1 Auto Tray Switch ...

Page 612: ...lex 4 duplex into 1 simplex 4 into 1 duplex 8 into 1 duplex 16 into 1 duplex 2 duplex into 1 duplex 4 duplex into 1 duplex 8 duplex into 1 duplex Shift Erase Margin Adjustment Centering Yes Cornering No Margin Adjustment 1mm step 0 30mm Default 0mm Scan Position Adjustment No Creep Adjustment No Erase Center 1mm step 2 99mm Default 10mm Erase Border 1mm step 2 99mm Default 10mm Cover Sheet Chapter...

Page 613: ...e Negative No Erase Inside No Erase Outside No Stamp Numbering Preset Stamp Yes 8 Stamps 2 sizes Not from the By pass tray User Stamp Yes 4 Stamps 1 sizes Not from the By pass tray Date Stamp Yes 5 Stamps Not from the By pass tray Page Number Yes 6 Stamps Not from the By pass tray Bates Numbering Yes Not from the By pass tray Printing copy prevention pattern Yes Sharp Soft 7 levels Contrast 9 leve...

Page 614: ... Print Resolution 1200 1200 dpi 600 600 dpi Font PCL Scalable 45 fonts Bitmapped 6 fonts International 13 fonts PS3 136 Roman fonts Host Interfaces Standard Ethernet 1000BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T SD card slot USB2 0 Host Option IEEE 1284 parallel interface IEEE 802 11a b g n wireless LAN interface Extended USB board USB device server Bluetooth interface Network Protocol TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 USB inter...

Page 615: ...in 216 mm 8 5 inches Sub 356 mm 14 0 inches sRGB Supported Yes Network Interface Standard Ethernet interface 1000BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T Option IEEE 802 11a b g n wireless LAN interface Protocol Network TCP IP Sending E mail SMTP Scan to Folder SMB FTP Web Services on Devices for Scanning Compression Type TIFF MH MR MMR JBIG2 JPEG Scan Mode BW Text Text Line Art Text Photo Photo Grey Scale Colo...

Page 616: ...r Full Color Single Page JPEG On BW Grayscale or Full Color JPEG Off Single Page PDF On BW 1bit MH MR MMR or JBIG2 BW Grayscale JPEG Full Color JPEG Off BW 1bit BW Grayscale or Full Color Multi Page PDF On BW 1bit MH MR MMR or JBIG2 BW Grayscale JPEG Full Color JPEG Off BW 1bit BW Grayscale or Full Color Single Page High Compression PDF On BW Grayscale JPEG or JPEG2000 Full Color JPEG or JPEG2000 ...

Page 617: ... addresses in one group address Input of Destination E mail Address via Soft Key Possible Max 100 destinations per job Search methods of Email Address in HDD By name and E mail address LDAP Search Yes Max Address Numbers Per Send Max 500 addresses per send Attention To cc bcc Email Size With Restriction 128 102 400 KB Without Restriction Input Subject Manual Max 128 Characters via soft key User Pr...

Page 618: ...sent files might not be accepted by the receiving side due to the limitation in the receiving capacity at the receiver SMTP server or E mail software setting Resend Yes No Default Yes Scan to Folder Item Spec Protocol Support SMB FTP Security Client folder log in log in name and password Encryption of log in name and password during transmission Resolution 100 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi D...

Page 619: ...oup address Max group 100 Max member per group 500 Input File Name Yes Scan to File size 2 000 MB per file File Size when combined Scan to Folder Scan to E mail 128 102 400 KB Default 2 048 KB With restriction 725MB Without restriction Scan to E mail file size applied File Type Single Page TIFF JPEG PDF High Compression PDF Secure PDF Digital Signature PDF Multi Page TIFF PDF High Compression PDF ...

Page 620: ...008 2008 R2 2012 2012 R2 Operates in 32 bit compatibility mode on 64 bit operating systems Resolution BW 100 1200 dpi Black and White Grayscale Color 100 1200 dpi Black and White Grayscale Scan Mode Standard Photo OCR Filing Image Adjustment Brightness Contrast Threshold Gamma Adjustment Halftone Pattern Endorser Supported Stamp Date Page Number Text ...

Page 621: ... photographic printing Development Monocomponent jumping development system Fusing System Roller fusing system Printer Language Standard PCL 5e 6 PostScript 3 PDF Option XPS IPDS Print Resolution 1200 1200 dpi 600 600 dpi Font PCL Scalable 45 fonts Bitmapped 6 fonts International 13 fonts PS3 136 Roman fonts Host Interfaces Standard Ethernet 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T Option IEEE 1284 parallel...

Page 622: ... 5 14 LG SEF 8 5 13 Foolscap SEF 8 5 11 LT SEF 8 25 14 Government LG SEF 8 25 13 Folio SEF 8 13 F GL SEF 8 10 Eng Quatro SEF 7 25 10 5 Executive SEF 5 5 8 5 Half Letter SEF Com10 SEF Monarch SEF C5 SEF C6 SEF DL Env SEF 16K SEF 8 5 13 4 SEF Custom Size Paper Width 92 0 mm 3 63 inch 216 0 mm 8 50 inch Length 162 0 mm 6 83 inch 356 0 mm 14 0 inch Recommended Paper Size Bypass Tray A4 SEF A5 SEF LEF ...

Page 623: ...per Thick Paper 1 Recycled Paper Color Paper Special Paper 1 Special Paper 2 Special Paper 3 Letterhead Paper Preprinted Paper Bond Paper Envelope Bypass Tray Thin Paper Plain Paper Plain Paper 2 Middle Thick Paper Thick Paper 1 Thick Paper 2 Thick Paper 3 Recycled Paper Color Paper Special Paper 1 Special Paper 2 Special Paper 3 Letterhead Paper Preprinted Paper Bond Paper OHP Label Paper Envelop...

Page 624: ...d wireless LAN board Noise emission Sound Power Level Complete System SP 5300 Stand by 30 7 dB A Printing 70 5 dB A SP 5310 Stand by 29 9 dB A Printing 70 1 dB A The complete system consists of the main unit four optional paper feed units and caster table Target Monthly ACV SP 5300 4 0K SP 5310 5 5K Reliability Max Monthly CV 5 years 15K PM Cycle 500K MCBC Mean Copy Between Calls 0 15 or less Dime...

Page 625: ...el E Supported Select the paper size using the control panel Not supported The duplex function cannot be used with envelopes Paper Size Tray 1 Main Paper Feed Tray Tray 2 to 5 Optional Paper Feed Tray Bypass Tray A4 SEF 210 297 mm C C E A5 SEF 148 210 mm C C E A5 LEF 210 148 mm D E A6 SEF 105 148 mm C E B5 SEF 182 257 mm D D E B6 SEF 128 182 mm D D E Legal SEF 8 5 14 inch C C E Foolscap SEF 8 5 13...

Page 626: ...E Com10 Env SEF 4 125 9 5 inch D E Monarch Env SEF 3 875 7 5 inch D E C5 Env SEF 162 229 mm D E C6 Env SEF 114 162 mm D E DL Env SEF 110 220 mm D E 16K SEF 195 267 mm D D E 8 1 2 13 2 5 SEF 8 5 13 4 inch D D E Custom Tray 1 Main Tray Tray 2 to 5 Optional Paper Feed Tray Bypass Tray Width 105 0 216 0 mm 4 14 8 50 inch 92 0 216 0 mm 3 63 8 50 inch 70 0 216 0 mm 2 76 8 50 inch Length 148 0 356 0 mm 5...

Page 627: ...to run installer allows you to select which components to install 1 4 1 PRINTER DRIVERS Windows OS Type PCL5c PCL6 PS3 XPS Windows Vista Starter Home Basic 3 3 1 Home Premium 3 3 1 Business 3 3 1 Ultimate 3 3 1 Enterprise 3 3 1 Windows 7 Starter Home Basic Home Premium Professional Ultimate Enterprise Windows 8 8 1 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Pro Enterprise RT Windows 10 Home ...

Page 628: ...e Edition 2 2 2 Datacenter Edition Web Edition Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Edition Enterprise Edition Standard without Hyper V Enterprise without Hyper V Datacenter Edition Web Edition Windows Server 2012 R2 Foundation Essentials Standard Datacenter Supported Not supported RPCS driver has been discontinued 1 SP1 or later is recommended 2 SP2 or later is Recommended 3 SP1 or later is recommende...

Page 629: ...BM AIX V 5L V5 3 V6 1 V7 1 SAP R 3 Environment Device Type Barcode OCR Package Device Type will be provided from SAP itself in SAP Printer Vendor Program For the detailed specification please refer to another announcement to be issued in the future Supported Barcode OCR Fonts Barcode Fonts Code 128 Code 39 Code 93 Codabar 2 of 5 interleaved Industrial Matrix MSI USPS UPC EAN OCR Fonts OCR A OCR B ...

Page 630: ...ng system for WIA driver Windows Vista SP1 or later 7 8 8 1 10 Windows Server 2008 2008 R2 2012 2012 R2 WIA scanner can function under both 32 and 64 bit operating systems Operating system for LAN FAX driver Windows Vista 7 8 8 1 10 Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 2008 2008 R2 2012 2012 R2 The LAN Fax driver lets you fax documents directly from your PC Address Book Editor and Cover Sheet Editor are to...

Page 631: ...PMENT 1 5 1 PAPER FEED UNIT PB1100 Item Spec Paper Size Half Letter SEF A4 SEF Paper Weight 64 120 g m2 17 44 lb Paper Capacity 500 sheets 500 sheets 1 tray with 80 g m2 paper Power Consumption Less than 13 W Average Dimension W D H 380 410 121 mm 15 0 16 2 4 8 inches Weight 4 0 kg 8 9 lb ...

Page 632: ......

Page 633: ...PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 634: ......

Page 635: ...s Symbol keys C Clean R Replace L Lubricant I Inspect Yield Parts The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield However the total copy print volume made by the machine will not reach the target yield within the machine s targeted lifetime if the machine is used under the target usage conditions ACV color ratio and P J So these parts are categorized not as PM parts but as yield parts EM p...

Page 636: ... Unit R Fusing Unit R Paper feed roller R C Wipe with a soft cloth infiltrated with alcohol or water Pickup roller R C Wipe with a soft cloth infiltrated with alcohol or water Separation roller R C Wipe with a soft cloth infiltrated with alcohol or water Bypass paper feed roller R C Wipe with a soft cloth infiltrated with alcohol or water MP 501 601 Registration sensor SP 5300 5310 Registration se...

Page 637: ... with a soft dry cloth Vent C Wipe with a soft dry cloth Paper Feed Unit PB1100 Item 500K EM Life Note Paper feed roller R C Wipe with a soft cloth infiltrated with alcohol or water Pickup roller R C Wipe with a soft cloth infiltrated with alcohol or water Separation roller R C Wipe with a soft cloth infiltrated with alcohol or water ...

Page 638: ......

Page 639: ...SP MODE TABLES REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 41 42 01 20 2017 Removed SP5759 Machine Limit Count ...

Page 640: ......

Page 641: ...ore Entering SP Mode For details ask your supervisor Exiting SP Mode MP 501 601 Press Exit on the operation panel twice to return to the copy window SP 5300 5310 Select End from the service mode main menu and then press OK 3 1 2 TYPES OF SP MODES Select one of the Service Program modes from the diagram below after you access the SP mode MP 501 601 System SP SP modes related to the engine functions...

Page 642: ...s all SP groups and sublevels 2 Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display 3 Opens the copy window copy mode so you can make test copies Press SP Mode highlighted in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen 4 Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number Then press The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing If...

Page 643: ...01 Only 1 In the SP mode select the test print Then press Copy Window 2 Use the copy window copier mode to select the appropriate settings paper size etc for the test print 3 Press Start to start the test print 4 Press SP Mode highlighted to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from step 1 Selecting the Program Number MP 501 601 Only Program numbers have two or three levels 1 Refer to the Servi...

Page 644: ...resentative cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator 1 If you cannot go into the SP mode ask the Administrator to log in as the machine administrator and then set Service Mode Lock to OFF MP 501 601 User Tools Machine Features System Settings Administr...

Page 645: ...t Thin Paper 60 63 g m2 16lb Plain Paper 1 64 74 g m2 17 20lb Plain Paper 2 75 90 g m2 20 24lb Middle Thick 91 105 g m2 24 28lb Thick Paper 1 106 135 g m2 28 36lb Thick Paper 2 136 170 g m2 36 63lb Thick Paper 3 171 220 g m2 63 80lb Paper Type N Normal paper MTH Middle thick paper TH Thick paper Paper Feed Station P Paper tray B By pass table Print Mode S Simplex D Duplex Notes on the LCD Since th...

Page 646: ...wever the settings in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers An asterisk to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this mode is stored in the NVRAM and EEPROM If you do a RAM clear this SP mode will be reset to the default value ENG and CTL show which NVRAM contains the data ENG EEPROM on the BiCU CTL NVRAM on the controller board A sharp to the ...

Page 647: ...to 9 9 0 0 1 mm step 1 001 006 By Pass Tray ENG 9 9 to 9 9 0 0 1 mm step 1 001 007 Duplex ENG 9 9 to 9 9 0 0 1 mm step 1002 Reistration Correct 1 002 001 Main ENG 9 9 to 9 9 0 0 1 mm step 1 002 002 Option Tray 1 ENG 9 9 to 9 9 0 0 1 mm step 1 002 003 Option Tray 2 ENG 9 9 to 9 9 0 0 1 mm step 1 002 004 Option Tray 3 ENG 9 9 to 9 9 0 0 1 mm step 1 002 005 Option Tray 4 ENG 9 9 to 9 9 0 0 1 mm step ...

Page 648: ...ss Tray ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 1901 Fuser Type Setting 1 901 001 ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 1998 Reserve SP 1 998 001 reserve01 ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 1 998 002 reserve02 ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 1 998 003 reserve03 ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 1 998 004 reserve04 ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 1 998 005 reserve05 ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 1 998 006 reserve06 ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 1 998 007 reserve07 ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 1 998 00...

Page 649: ...p 1 998 021 reserve21 ENG 0 to 65535 0 1 step 1 998 022 reserve22 ENG 0 to 65535 0 1 step 1 998 023 reserve23 ENG 0 to 65535 0 1 step 1 998 024 reserve24 ENG 0 to 65535 0 1 step 1 998 025 reserve25 ENG 0 to 4294967295 0 1 step 1 998 026 reserve26 ENG 0 to 4294967295 0 1 step 1 998 027 reserve27 ENG 0 to 4294967295 0 1 step 1 998 028 reserve28 ENG 0 to 4294967295 0 1 step 1 998 029 reserve29 ENG 0 ...

Page 650: ...step 2 103 002 Right Edge Width ENG 0 to 9 9 4 0 1 mm step 2 103 003 Lead Edge Width ENG 0 to 9 9 4 0 1 mm step 2 103 004 Trail Edge Width ENG 0 to 9 9 4 0 1 mm step 2107 Image Parameter 2 107 001 Image Gamma Flag ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step 2107 Vsync Timing 2 107 130 Normal ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 2 107 131 Thick ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 2109 Test Pattern 2 109 003 Pattern Selection ENG 0 to 24 0 1 step 2 10...

Page 651: ...h SP 5300 5310 Menu Maintenance Quality Maintenance Drum Refresh 3 901 001 ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 3902 UP Auto Drum Refresh MP 501 601 User Tools Machine Features Maintenance Auto Drum Refresh SP 5300 5310 Menu Maintenance Quality Maintenance Auto Drum Refresh 3 902 001 ENG 0 to 3 2 1 step 3903 UP Altitude Adjust MP 501 601 User Tools Machine Features Maintenance Altitude Adjustment SP 5300 5310 Menu...

Page 652: ...5 D256 M281 M282 3 12 SM Appendix 3904 UP MainCharger Output MP 501 601 User Tools Machine Features Maintenance Charger Output SP 5300 5310 Menu Maintenance Quality Maintenance Charger Output 3 904 001 ENG 1 to 5 3 1 step ...

Page 653: ...601 only Scanner Erase Margin Scale 4 012 001 Book Leading Edge ENG 0 to 10 0 0 1 mm step 4 012 002 Book Trailing Edge ENG 0 to 10 0 0 1 mm step 4 012 003 Book Left ENG 0 to 10 0 0 1 mm step 4 012 004 Book Right ENG 0 to 10 0 0 1 mm step 4013 MP 501 601 only Scanner Free run 4 013 002 Book mode Lamp On ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 4020 MP 501 601 only DF Dust Check 4 020 001 Dust Detect On Off ENG 0 or 1 0...

Page 654: ...01 ENG 45 to 45 0 1 pulse step 4400 MP 501 601 only Scanner Erase Margin 4 400 001 Book Leading Edge ENG 0 to 10 0 0 1 mm step 4 400 002 Book Trailing Edge ENG 0 to 10 0 0 1 mm step 4 400 003 Book Left ENG 0 to 10 0 0 1 mm step 4 400 004 Book Right ENG 0 to 10 0 0 1 mm step 4 400 005 ADF Trailing Edge ENG 0 to 10 0 0 1 mm step 4 400 007 ADF Left ENG 0 to 10 0 0 1 mm step 4 400 008 ADF Right ENG 0 ...

Page 655: ...an ENG 384 to 255 100 1 digit step 4 610 002 G DF Scan ENG 384 to 255 100 1 digit step 4 610 003 BW Book Scan ENG 384 to 255 100 1 digit step 4 610 004 BW Book Scan ENG 384 to 255 100 1 digit step 4611 MP 501 601 only Gray Balance Set 4 611 001 B Book Scan ENG 384 to 255 100 1 digit step 4 611 002 B DF Scan ENG 384 to 255 100 1 digit step 4646 MP 501 601 only Scan Adjust Error 4 646 001 White leve...

Page 656: ...y ADF Adjustment Density 4 688 001 ENG 50 to 150 103 1 step 4699 MP 501 601 only SBU Test Pattern Change 4 699 001 ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 4903 MP 501 601 only Filter Setting 4 903 001 Ind Dot Erase Text ENG 0 to 7 0 1 step 4 903 002 Ind Dot Erase Generation Copy ENG 0 to 7 0 1 step 4905 MP 501 601 only Select Gradation Level 4 905 001 ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step ...

Page 657: ...Edge ENG 0 to 31 15 1 step 4 938 006 Scan Sub TEdge ENG 0 to 31 15 1 step 4 938 007 Scan Main LEdge ENG 0 to 31 15 1 step 4 938 008 Scan Main TEdge ENG 0 to 31 15 1 step 4939 MP 501 601 only ACS Color Range 4 939 001 ENG 2 to 2 0 1 step 4954 MP 501 601 only Restore Test Chart 4 954 005 Chromaticity Rank ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step ...

Page 658: ... 4 D255 D256 M281 M282 3 18 SM Appendix 4994 MP 501 601 only Adj Txt Photo Recog Level 4 994 001 High Compression PDF ENG 0 to 2 1 1 step 4996 MP 501 601 only White Paper Detection Level 4 996 001 ENG 0 to 6 3 1 step ...

Page 659: ...ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 5803 INPUT Check 5 803 001 Exit Full Sensor ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 803 016 Key Card Set ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 803 017 Key Counter Set ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 803 018 IPU Version ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 5804 OUTPUT Check 5 804 001 CTLFAN Motor ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 804 101 FAN LSU DLP CENTER REAR ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 804 102 FAN LVU ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 804 103 Toner Motor ENG 0 or 1...

Page 660: ...4 IPU ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 5811 Machine Serial Update Date 5 811 021 Latest ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 811 022 Previous ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 5811 MachineSerial 5 811 023 Previous ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 5811 Machine Serial Update Date 5 811 024 Latest IPU ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 811 025 Previous IPU ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 5811 MachineSerial 5 811 026 Previous IPU ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 5894 ExternalCountSet 5 ...

Page 661: ...er ENG 0 to 3 0 1 step 5901 All Data Initialize 5 901 005 China ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 901 006 EU 230V ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 901 007 NA 120V ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 901 008 Asia ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 901 009 Oceania ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 5930 Meter Charge 5 930 001 Setting ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step 5931 Life Alert Disp 5 931 001 Mentenance Kit ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step ...

Page 662: ...L 0 or 1 0 0 step 5009 MP 501 601 only Add display language 5 009 201 1 8 CTL 0 to 255 0 1 step 5 009 202 9 16 5 009 203 17 24 5 009 204 25 32 5 009 205 33 40 CTL 0 to 255 0 1 step 5 009 206 41 48 5 009 207 49 56 5024 mm inch Display selection 5 024 001 0 mm 1 inch CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5045 MP 501 601 only Accounting Counter 5 045 001 Counter Method CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step ...

Page 663: ...1 CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5071 MP 501 601 only Set Bypass Paper Size Display 5 071 001 CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5074 MP 501 601 only Home Key Customization 5 074 002 Login Setting CTL 0 to 255 0 1 step 5 074 050 Show Home Edit Menu CTL 0 to 2 0 1 step 5 074 091 Function Setting CTL 0 to 2 0 1 step 5 074 092 Product ID CTL 0 to 0xffffffff 0 1 step 5 074 093 Application Screen ID CTL 0 to 255 0 1 step ...

Page 664: ...MP 501 601 only ServiceSP Entry Code Setting 5 081 001 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5083 LED Light Switch Setting 5 083 001 Toner Near End CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 083 002 Waste Toner Near End CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5113 MP 501 601 only Optional Counter Type 5 113 001 Default Optional Counter Type CTL 0 to 12 0 1 step 5 113 002 External Optional Counter Type CTL 0 to 3 0 1 step ...

Page 665: ...MP 501 601 only Disable Copying 5 118 001 CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5120 Mode Clear Opt Counter Removal MP 501 601 only 5 120 001 0 Yes 1 StandBy 2 No CTL 0 to 2 0 1 step 5121 MP 501 601 only Counter Up Timing 5 121 001 0 Feed 1 Exit CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5127 MP 501 601 only APS OFF Mode 5 127 001 CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5150 Length Setting 5 150 001 Bypass 0 OFF 1 Long CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step ...

Page 666: ...MP 501 601 only Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off 5 167 001 CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5169 CE Login 5 169 001 CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5188 MP 501 601 only Copy Nv Version 5 188 001 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5191 Mode Set 5 191 001 Power Str Set CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5195 Limitless SW 5 195 001 CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5212 MP 501 601 only Page Numbering ...

Page 667: ...ttom Facing CTL 10 to 10 0 0 01 mm step 5 212 019 Duplex Printout Top Bottom Position of Top Bottom Facing CTL 10 to 10 0 0 01 mm step 5227 MP 501 601 only Page Numbering 5 227 201 Allow Page No Entry CTL 2 to 9 9 1 step 5 227 202 Zero Surplus Setting CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5302 Set Time 5 302 002 Time Difference CTL 1440 to 1440 540 1 step 5305 Auto Off Set 5 305 101 Auto Off Limit Set CTL 0 or 1 1 ...

Page 668: ...on Method CTL 0 to 0xFF 0 1 step 5 401 210 SDK2 UniqueID CTL 0 to 0xFFFFFFFF 0 1 step 5 401 211 SDK2 Certification Method CTL 0 to 0xFF 0 1 step 5 401 220 SDK3 UniqueID CTL 0 to 0xFFFFFFFF 0 1 step 5 401 221 SDK3 Certification Method CTL 0 to 0xFF 0 1 step 5 401 230 SDK Certification Device CTL 0 to 0xff 0 1 step 5 401 240 Detail Option CTL 0 to 0xff 0 1 step 5402 Access Control 5 402 101 SDKJ1 Li...

Page 669: ...SDKJ15 Limit Setting CTL 5 402 116 SDKJ16 Limit Setting CTL 0 to 0xFF 0 1 step 5 402 117 SDKJ17 Limit Setting CTL 5 402 118 SDKJ18 Limit Setting CTL 5 402 119 SDKJ19 Limit Setting CTL 5 402 120 SDKJ20 Limit Setting CTL 5 402 121 SDKJ21 Limit Setting CTL 5 402 122 SDKJ22 Limit Setting CTL 5 402 123 SDKJ23 Limit Setting CTL 5 402 124 SDKJ24 Limit Setting CTL 5 402 125 SDKJ25 Limit Setting CTL 5 402 ...

Page 670: ...8 ProductID CTL 5 402 149 SDKJ9 ProductID CTL 0 to 0xffffffff 0 1 step 5 402 150 SDKJ10 ProductID CTL 5 402 151 SDKJ11 ProductID CTL 5 402 152 SDKJ12 ProductID CTL 5 402 153 SDKJ13 ProductID CTL 5 402 154 SDKJ14 ProductID CTL 5 402 155 SDKJ15 ProductID CTL 5 402 156 SDKJ16 ProductID CTL 5 402 157 SDKJ17 ProductID CTL 5 402 158 SDKJ18 ProductID CTL 5 402 159 SDKJ19 ProductID CTL 5 402 160 SDKJ20 Pr...

Page 671: ...0 0 step 5 404 101 User Code Count Clear Permit Setting CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5411 LDAP Certification 5 411 004 Simplified Authentication CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 411 005 Password Null Not Permit CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 411 006 Detail Option CTL 0 to 0xff 0 1 step 5412 Krb Certification 5 412 100 Encrypt Mode CTL 0 to 0xFF 0x1F 1 step 5413 Lockout Setting 5 413 001 Lockout On Off CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 41...

Page 672: ... 001 Access User Max Num CTL 50 to 200 200 1 step 5 416 002 Access Password Max Num CTL 50 to 200 200 1 step 5 416 003 Monitor Interval CTL 1 to 10 3 1 step 5417 Access Attack 5 417 001 Access Permissible Number CTL 0 to 500 100 1 step 5 417 002 Attack DetectTime CTL 10 to 30 10 1 sec step 5 417 003 Productivity Fall Waite CTL 0 to 9 3 1 sec step 5 417 004 Attack Max Num CTL 50 to 200 200 1 step 5...

Page 673: ...71 SDK3 CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 420 081 Browser CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step MP 501 601 only 5430 MP 501 601 only Auth Dialog Message Change 5 430 001 Message Change On Off CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 430 002 Message Text Download CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 430 003 Message Text ID CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5431 MP 501 601 only External Auth User Preset 5 431 010 Tag CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 431 011 Entry CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 4...

Page 674: ...h CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 431 037 AcntAcl CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 431 038 DocumentAcl CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 431 040 CertCrypt CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 431 050 UserLimitCount CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5481 Authentication Error Code 5 481 001 System Log Disp CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 481 002 Panel Disp CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step MP 501 601 only 5490 MP 501 601 only MF KeyCard 5 490 001 Job Permit Setting CTL 0 or 1 0 1 ste...

Page 675: ... 99 5 1 step 5507 Supply CC Alarm 5 507 001 Paper Supply Alarm CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 507 003 Toner Supply Alarm CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 507 006 WasteTonerBottle Supply Alarm CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 507 080 Toner Call Timing CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 507 081 Toner Call Threshold CTL 10 to 90 10 10 step 5 507 128 Interval Others CTL 250 to 10000 1000 1 step 5 507 133 Interval A4 CTL 250 to 10000 1000 1 step...

Page 676: ...me Length CTL 3 to 30 10 1 step 5 508 012 Jam Detection Continuous Count CTL 2 to 10 5 1 step 5 508 013 Door Open Time Length CTL 3 to 30 10 1 step 5515 SC Alarm Setting 5 515 001 SC Call CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 515 002 Service Parts Near End Call CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 515 003 Service Parts End Call CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 515 004 User Call CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 515 006 Communication Test Call CTL 0 o...

Page 677: ...CTL 0 to 255 10 1 min step 5728 Network Setting 5 728 001 NAT Machine Port1 CTL 1 to 65535 49101 1 step 5 728 002 NAT UI Port1 CTL 1 to 65535 55101 1 step 5 728 003 NAT Machine Port2 CTL 1 to 65535 49102 1 step 5 728 004 NAT UI Port2 CTL 1 to 65535 55102 1 step 5 728 005 NAT Machine Port3 CTL 1 to 65535 49103 1 step 5 728 006 NAT UI Port3 CTL 1 to 65535 55103 1 step 5 728 007 NAT Machine Port4 CTL...

Page 678: ... CTL 1 to 65535 49109 1 step 5 728 018 NAT UI Port9 CTL 1 to 65535 55109 1 step 5 728 019 NAT Machine Port10 CTL 1 to 65535 49110 1 step 5 728 020 NAT UI Port10 CTL 1 to 65535 55110 1 step 5730 MP 501 601 only Extended Function Setting 5 730 001 JavaTM Platform setting CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 730 010 Expiration Prior Alarm Set CTL 0 to 999 20 1 days step 5731 Counter Effect 5 731 001 Change Mk1 Cnt ...

Page 679: ...TL 0 to 9999 0 1 step 5 745 214 Scanning and Printing CTL 0 to 9999 0 1 step 5 745 215 Printing CTL 0 to 9999 0 1 step 5 745 216 Scanning CTL 0 to 9999 0 1 step 5 745 217 Engine Standby CTL 0 to 9999 0 1 step 5 745 218 Low Power Consumption CTL 0 to 9999 0 1 step 5 745 219 Silent condition CTL 0 to 9999 0 1 step 5 745 220 Heater Off CTL 0 to 9999 0 1 step 5748 MP 501 601 only OpePanel Setting 5 74...

Page 680: ...751 MP 501 601 only Key Event Encryption Setting 5 751 001 Password CTL 0 to 255 0 1 step 5752 MP 501 601 only Copy WebAPI Setting 5 752 001 Copy FlairAPI Setting CTL 0 to 255 0 1 step 5755 MP 501 601 only Display Setting 5 755 001 Disp Administrator Password Change Scrn CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 755 002 Hide Administrator Password Change Scrn CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step ...

Page 681: ...TL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 801 003 SCS CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 801 004 IMH Memory Clr CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 801 005 MCS CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 801 006 Copier application CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 801 007 Fax Application CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 801 008 Printer Application CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 801 009 Scanner Application CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 801 010 Web Service CTL...

Page 682: ...17 CCS CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 801 018 SRM Memory Clr CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 801 019 LCS CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 801 020 Web Uapli CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 801 021 ECS CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 801 023 AICS CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 801 025 websys CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 801 026 PLN CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 801 027 SAS CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 801 028 Rest WebService CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step Re...

Page 683: ... 0 to 2 2 1 step 5 816 002 CE Call CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 816 003 Function Flag CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 816 007 SSL Disable CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 816 008 RCG Connect Timeout CTL 1 to 90 30 1 sec step 5 816 009 RCG Write Timeout CTL 0 to 100 60 1 sec step 5 816 010 RCG Read Timeout CTL 0 to 100 60 1 sec step 5 816 011 Port 80 Enable CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5816 Remote Service 5 816 013 RFU Timing CTL 0 or...

Page 684: ...us CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 816 085 Firm Up User Check CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 816 086 Firmware Size CTL 0x00 to 0xffff 0x00 1 step 5 816 087 CERT Macro Ver CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 816 088 CERT PAC Ver CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 816 089 CERT ID2Code CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 816 090 CERT Subject CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 816 091 CERT Serial No CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 816 092 CERT Issuer CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 816 093 CE...

Page 685: ...7 Register Result CTL 0 to 255 0 1 step 5 816 208 Error Code CTL 2147483647 to 2147483647 0 0 step 5 816 209 Instl Clear CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 816 240 CommErrorTime CTL 0 to 0 0 1 step 5 816 241 CommErrorCode 1 CTL 0x00 to 0xffff 0x00 1 step 5 816 242 CommErrorCode 2 CTL 0x00 to 0xffff 0x00 1 step 5 816 243 CommErrorCode 3 CTL 0x00 to 0xffff 0x00 1 step 5 816 244 CommErrorState 1 CTL 0 to 0xffff 0...

Page 686: ...p 5 821 007 RCG Host Name CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 821 008 RCG Host URL Path CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5824 NV RAM Data Upload 5 824 001 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5825 NV RAM Data Download 5 825 001 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5828 Network Setting 5 828 050 1284 Compatiblity Centro CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 828 052 ECP Centro CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 828 065 Job Spooling CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 828 066 Job Spooling Clear Start T...

Page 687: ...to 0 0 0 step 5 828 153 Active IPv6 Stateless Address 4 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 828 155 Active IPv6 Stateless Address 5 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 828 156 IPv6 Manual Address CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 828 158 IPv6 Gateway Address CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 828 161 IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 828 219 IPsec Aggressive Mode Setting CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 828 236 Web Item visible CTL 0x0000 to 0x...

Page 688: ...32 003 HDD Formatting Thumbnail OCR CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 832 004 HDD Formatting Job Log CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 832 005 HDD Formatting Printer Fonts CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 832 006 HDD Formatting User Info CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 832 007 Mail RX Data CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 832 008 Mail TX Data CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 ...

Page 689: ...vr CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 836 013 Capture Setting Fax RX Printer CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 836 014 Capture Setting Fax TX CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 836 015 Capture Setting Printer CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 836 016 Capture Setting Scanner CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 836 017 Capture Setting SDK CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 836 061 Captured File Resend 0 Off 1 On CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 836 072 Reduction for Copy B W Text CTL 0...

Page 690: ...rimary srv port number CTL CTL 5 836 104 Primary srv URL path CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 836 111 Secondary srv IP address CTL 0 to 0xffffffff 0x00 0 step 5 836 112 Secondary srv scheme CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 836 113 Secondary srv port number CTL 1 to 65535 80 1 step 5 836 114 Secondary srv URL path CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 836 120 Default Reso Rate Switch CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 836 122 Reso Copy Mono CTL 0 ...

Page 691: ... 836 143 ClearLightPDF Switch CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5840 IEEE 802 11 5 840 006 Channel MAX CTL 1 to 14 14 1 step 5 840 007 Channel MIN CTL 1 to 14 1 1 step 5 840 011 WEP Key Select CTL 0x00 to 0x11 0x00 1 step 5 840 045 WPA Debug Lvl CTL 1 to 3 3 1 step 5 840 046 11w CTL 0 to 2 0 1 step 5 840 047 PSK Set Type CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5841 MP 501 601 only Supply Name Setting 5 841 001 Toner Name Setting B...

Page 692: ...5 844 008 Mac Supply Level CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5 844 100 Notify Unsupport CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5845 Delivery Server Setting 5 845 001 FTP Port No CTL 1 to 65535 3670 1 step MP 501 601 only 5 845 002 IP Address Primary CTL 0 to 0xffffffff 0x00 step MP 501 601 only 5 845 003 Retry Interval CTL 60 to 900 300 1 sec step SP 5300 5310 only 5 845 004 No of Retries CTL 0 to 99 3 1 step SP 5300 5310 only 5 ...

Page 693: ...01 601 only 5 845 017 Server Port Number Secondary CTL 1 to 65535 80 1 step MP 501 601 only 5 845 018 Server URL Path Secondary CTL 0 to 0 0 1 step MP 501 601 only 5 845 022 Rapid Sending Control CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5846 UCS Setting 5 846 001 Machine ID for Delivery Server CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 846 002 Machine ID Clear for Delivery Server CTL 0 to 0 0 1 step MP 501 601 only 5 846 0...

Page 694: ...ize Delivery Addr Book CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 846 049 Initialize LDAP Addr Book CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 846 050 Initialize All Addr Book CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 846 051 Backup All Addr Book CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 846 052 Restore All Addr Book CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 846 053 Clear Backup Info CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 846 060 Search option CTL 0x00 to 0xff 0x0f 1 step 5 846 062 Complexity optio...

Page 695: ... 5848 Web Service 5 848 002 Access Ctrl Repository onlyLower4bits CTL 0x00 to 0xFF 0x02 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 848 003 Access Ctrl Doc Svr Print Lower 4bits CTL 0x00 to 0xFF 0x00 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 848 004 Access Ctrl udirectory Lower 4bits CTL 0x00 to 0xFF 0x00 0 step 5 848 007 Access Ctrl Comm Log Fax Lower 4bits CTL 0x00 to 0xFF 0x00 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 848 009 Access Ctrl Job Ctrl...

Page 696: ...Setting CTL 0x00 to 0xFF 0x00 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 848 100 Repository Download Image Max Size CTL 1 to 2048 2048 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 848 150 Log Operation Mode CTL 0 to 9 0 1 step 5848 LogTrans 5 848 217 Setting Timing CTL 0 to 2 0 1 step 5849 Installation Date 5 849 001 Display CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 849 002 Switch to Print CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 849 003 Total Counter CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1...

Page 697: ...OFF 1 ON CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 858 111 Acquire All Info Logs CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 858 121 Acquire Configuration Page CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 858 122 Acquire Font Page CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 858 123 Acquire Print Setting List CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 858 124 Acquire Error Log CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 858 131 Acquire Fax Info CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 858 141 Acquire All Debug Logs CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 858 142...

Page 698: ...0 only 5 860 009 Mail Receive Protocol CTL 1 to 3 1 1 step SP 5300 5310 only 5 860 013 POP3 IMAP4 Auth Encryption CTL 0 to 2 0 1 step SP 5300 5310 only 5 860 014 POP3 Srvr Port No CTL 1 to 65535 110 1 step SP 5300 5310 only 5 860 015 IMAP4 Srvr Port No CTL 1 to 65535 143 1 step SP 5300 5310 only 5 860 016 SMTP Rx Port No CTL 1 to 65535 25 1 step SP 5300 5310 only 5 860 017 Mail Rx Interval CTL 2 t...

Page 699: ... CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step SP 5300 5310 only 5 866 110 CounterE Mail Validity CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step MP 501 601 only 5 866 111 CounterE Mail Destination Registration CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 866 112 CounterE Mail Send Test CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 866 113 CounterE Mail Next Send Date CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 866 114 CounterE Mail Send Date Setting CTL 0 to 31 0 1 step...

Page 700: ... 0 1 step 5 870 003 Initialize CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 870 004 Writing 2048bit CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5873 SDCardAppliMove 5 873 001 MoveExec CTL 0 to 0 0 1 step 5 873 002 UndoExec CTL 0 to 0 0 1 step 5875 SC Auto Reboot 5 875 001 Reboot Setting CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 875 002 Reboot Type CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 5878 Option Setup 5 878 001 Data Overwrite Security CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 878 002 HDD Encryption ...

Page 701: ... 1 step 5 885 100 Set Signature CTL 0 to 2 0 1 step 5 885 101 Set Encrypsion CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 885 200 Detect Mem Leak CTL 0x00 to 0xFF 0x00 0 step 5886 MP 501 601 only Farm Update Setting 5 886 100 Skip Version Check CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 886 101 Skip LR Check CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 886 111 Auto Update Setting CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 886 112 Auto Update Prohibit Term Setting CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step ...

Page 702: ...te Prohibit Day of Week Setting CTL 0 to 255 0 1 step 5 886 150 Cheetah Firm Exclusion CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5 886 201 Restore Date CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 886 202 Save Old Version List CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5887 SD Get Counter 5 887 001 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5888 Personal Information Protect 5 888 001 CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5893 SDK Application Counter 5 893 001 SDK 1 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 893 002 SDK 2 CTL...

Page 703: ...TL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 893 011 SDK 11 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 893 012 SDK 12 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5907 Plug Play Maker Model Name 5 907 001 CTL 0 to 255 0 1 step 5913 MP 501 601 only Switchover Permission Time 5 913 002 Print Application Timer CTL 0 to 30 3 1 step 5967 MP 501 601 only Copy Server Set Function 5 967 001 0 ON 1 OFF CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 5973 MP 501 601 only User Stamp Registration 5 973 10...

Page 704: ...p 5 990 005 Diagnostic Report CTL 0 to 255 0 0 step 5 990 006 Non Default CTL 0 to 255 0 0 step 5 990 007 NIB Summary CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 990 008 Capture Log CTL 0 to 255 0 1 step MP 501 601 only 5 990 022 Scanner SP CTL 0 to 255 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 990 023 Scanner User Program CTL 0 to 255 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 990 024 SDK J Summary CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 990 025 SDK J Application In...

Page 705: ... Diagnostic Report CTL 0 to 255 0 0 step 5 992 006 Non Default CTL 0 to 255 0 0 step 5 992 007 NIB Summary CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 5 992 008 Capture Log CTL 0 to 255 0 1 step MP 501 601 only 5 992 021 Copier User Program CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 992 022 Scanner SP CTL 0 to 255 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 992 023 Scanner User Program CTL 0 to 255 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 5 992 024 SDK J Sum...

Page 706: ...Main SP Tables 5 Controller D255 D256 M281 M282 3 66 SM Appendix 5 992 028 SmartOperationPanel UP CTL 0 to 255 0 0 step MP 501 601 only ...

Page 707: ...p 6026 ADF Timing Adjustment 6 026 001 Leading Edge Start Timing Front ENG 32 to 32 0 1 pulse step 6 026 002 Leading Edge Start Timing Rear ENG 32 to 32 0 1 pulse step 6 026 003 Leading Edge End Timing Front ENG 32 to 32 0 1 pulse step 6 026 004 Leading Edge End Timing Rear ENG 32 to 32 0 1 pulse step 6027 ADF Adjustment Scan Speed 6 027 001 Simplex Mode ENG 2 5 to 2 5 0 0 1 step 6 027 002 Duplex ...

Page 708: ... 0 step 7 801 019 P PFU2 ENG 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 801 040 P PFU3 ENG 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 801 041 P PFU4 ENG 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 801 102 Version Engine ENG 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 801 109 Version PFU1 ENG 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 801 115 Version IPU ENG 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 801 119 Version PFU2 ENG 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 801 140 Version PFU3 ENG 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 801 141 Version PFU4 ENG 0 to 0 0 0 step 7804 Reset PM Count 7 ...

Page 709: ...ep 7 979 003 Data3 ENG 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 0x0000 1 step 7 979 004 Data4 ENG 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 0x0000 1 step 7 979 005 Data5 ENG 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 0x0000 1 step 7 979 006 Data6 ENG 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 0x0000 1 step 7 979 007 Data7 ENG 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 0x0000 1 step 7 979 008 Data8 ENG 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 0x0000 1 step 7 979 009 Data9 ENG 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 0x0000 1 step 7 979 010 Data10 ENG 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 0x...

Page 710: ...p 7 979 015 Data15 ENG 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 0x0000 1 step 7 979 016 Data16 ENG 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 0x0000 1 step 7 979 017 Data17 ENG 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 0x0000 1 step 7 979 018 Data18 ENG 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 0x0000 1 step 7 979 019 Data19 ENG 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 0x0000 1 step 7 979 020 Data20 ENG 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 0x0000 1 step 7 979 021 Data21 ENG 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 0x0000 1 step ...

Page 711: ...t 2 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 403 004 Latest 3 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 403 005 Latest 4 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 403 006 Latest 5 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 403 007 Latest 6 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 403 008 Latest 7 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 403 009 Latest 8 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 403 010 Latest 9 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7404 Software Error History 7 404 001 Latest CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 404 002 Latest 1 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step...

Page 712: ... 65535 0 0 step 7 502 002 Total Jam Counter CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7503 MP 501 601 only Total Original Jam Counter 7 503 001 CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7503 MP 501 601 only Total Original Jam 7 503 002 Total Original Counter CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7504 Paper Jam Location 7 504 001 At Power On CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 010 Process Not Ready CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 011 Transport Not Ready C...

Page 713: ...021 Printing Error Jam 7 CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 022 Printing Error Jam 8 CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 023 Printing Error Jam 9 CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 024 Printing Error Jam 10 CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 025 Printing Error Jam 11 CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 026 Printing Error Jam 12 CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 027 Exceed Duplex Interleaf Limit CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 028...

Page 714: ...4 041 Feed2 Sensor OFF Cass3 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 042 Feed2 Sensor OFF Cass4 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 043 Feed2 Sensor OFF Cass5 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 044 Feed3 Sensor ON Cass4 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 045 Feed3 Sensor ON Cass5 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 046 Feed3 Sensor OFF Cass4 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 047 Feed3 Sensor OFF Cass5 F...

Page 715: ...CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 056 Registration Sensor OFF Cass4 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 057 Registration Sensor OFF Cass5 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 058 Registration Exit Sensor ON Cass1 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 059 Registration Exit Sensor ON Cass2 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 060 Registration Exit Sensor ON Cass3 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 061 Registrat...

Page 716: ...535 0 0 step 7 504 068 Registration Exit Sensor OFF Cass4 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 069 Registration Exit Sensor OFF Cass5 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 070 Registration Exit Sensor OFF Duplex Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 071 Registration Exit Sensor OFF MFP Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 072 Exit Sensor ON Cass1 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 073 Exit Sensor ON Cass2 F...

Page 717: ...p 7 504 081 Exit Sensor OFF Cass3 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 082 Exit Sensor OFF Cass4 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 083 Exit Sensor OFF Cass5 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 084 Exit Sensor OFF Duplex Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 085 Exit Sensor OFF MFP Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 086 Duplex Trans Sensor1 ON Cass1 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 087 Duplex Trans Se...

Page 718: ... 0 0 step 7 504 094 Duplex Trans Sensor2 ON Cass3 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 095 Duplex Trans Sensor2 ON Cass4 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 096 Duplex Trans Sensor2 ON Cass5 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 097 Duplex Trans Sensor2 ON MFP Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 098 Duplex Trans Sensor2 OFF Duplex Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 504 099 Tray 2 On CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7...

Page 719: ...EF CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 506 133 A4 SEF CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 506 134 A5 SEF CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 506 142 B5 SEF CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 506 164 LG SEF CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 506 166 LT SEF CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 506 172 HLT SEF CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 506 255 Others CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7507 Plotter Jam History 7 507 001 Latest CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 507 002 Latest 1 CTL ...

Page 720: ...8 003 Latest 2 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 508 004 Latest 3 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 508 005 Latest 4 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 508 006 Latest 5 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 508 007 Latest 6 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 508 008 Latest 7 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 508 009 Latest 8 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 508 010 Latest 9 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7514 Paper Jam Count by Location 7 514 001 At Power On CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 010 Pro...

Page 721: ...021 Printing Error Jam 7 CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 022 Printing Error Jam 8 CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 023 Printing Error Jam 9 CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 024 Printing Error Jam 10 CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 025 Printing Error Jam 11 CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 026 Printing Error Jam 12 CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 027 Exceed Duplex Interleaf Limit CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 028...

Page 722: ...4 041 Feed2 Sensor OFF Cass3 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 042 Feed2 Sensor OFF Cass4 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 043 Feed2 Sensor OFF Cass5 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 044 Feed3 Sensor ON Cass4 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 045 Feed3 Sensor ON Cass5 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 046 Feed3 Sensor OFF Cass4 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 047 Feed3 Sensor OFF Cass5 F...

Page 723: ...CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 056 Registration Sensor OFF Cass4 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 057 Registration Sensor OFF Cass5 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 058 Registration Exit Sensor ON Cass1 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 059 Registration Exit Sensor ON Cass2 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 060 Registration Exit Sensor ON Cass3 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 061 Registrat...

Page 724: ...535 0 0 step 7 514 068 Registration Exit Sensor OFF Cass4 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 069 Registration Exit Sensor OFF Cass5 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 070 Registration Exit Sensor OFF Duplex Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 071 Registration Exit Sensor OFF MFP Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 072 Exit Sensor ON Cass1 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 073 Exit Sensor ON Cass2 F...

Page 725: ...p 7 514 081 Exit Sensor OFF Cass3 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 082 Exit Sensor OFF Cass4 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 083 Exit Sensor OFF Cass5 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 084 Exit Sensor OFF Duplex Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 085 Exit Sensor OFF MFP Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 086 Duplex Trans Sensor1 ON Cass1 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 087 Duplex Trans Se...

Page 726: ... 0 0 step 7 514 094 Duplex Trans Sensor2 ON Cass3 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 095 Duplex Trans Sensor2 ON Cass4 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 096 Duplex Trans Sensor2 ON Cass5 Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 097 Duplex Trans Sensor2 ON MFP Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 098 Duplex Trans Sensor2 OFF Duplex Feed CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 514 099 Tray 2 On CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7...

Page 727: ... 65535 0 0 step 7 516 133 A4 SEF CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 516 134 A5 SEF CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 516 142 B5 SEF CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 516 164 LG SEF CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 516 166 LT SEF CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 516 172 HLT SEF CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7 516 255 Others CTL 0 to 65535 0 0 step 7520 Update Log 7 520 001 ErrorRecord1 CTL 0 to 255 0 1 step 7 520 002 ErrorRecord2 CTL 0 to 255...

Page 728: ...01 601 only 7 520 014 Auto StartDate4 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 7 520 015 Auto StartDate5 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 7 520 021 Auto EndDate1 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 7 520 022 Auto EndDate2 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 7 520 023 Auto EndDate3 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 7 520 024 Auto EndDate4 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 7 520 025 Auto EndDate5 ...

Page 729: ...uto Version4 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 7 520 045 Auto Version5 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 7 520 051 Auto Result1 CTL 0 to 255 0 1 step MP 501 601 only 7 520 052 Auto Result2 CTL 0 to 255 0 1 step MP 501 601 only 7 520 053 Auto Result3 CTL 0 to 255 0 1 step MP 501 601 only 7 520 054 Auto Result4 CTL 0 to 255 0 1 step MP 501 601 only 7 520 055 Auto Result5 CTL 0 to 255 0 1 step MP...

Page 730: ... 7 801 255 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7803 PM Counter Display 7 803 001 Paper CTL 0 to 9999999 0 0 step 7804 PM Counter Reset 7 804 001 Paper CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7807 SC Jam Counter Reset 7 807 001 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7826 MP 501 601 only MF Error Counter 7 826 001 Error Total CTL 0 to 9999999 0 0 step 7 826 002 Error Staple CTL 0 to 9999999 0 0 step 7827 MP 501 601 only MF Error Couter Clear 7 827 001 C...

Page 731: ...ep 7 840 002 Change Time Last1 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 840 101 Initialize Time Latest CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 840 102 Initialize Time Last1 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7901 Assert Info 7 901 001 File Name CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 901 002 Number of Lines CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 901 003 Location CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7910 ROM No 7 910 001 System Copy CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 910 002 Engine CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 910 003 L...

Page 732: ...S CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 910 158 PCL CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 910 159 PCLXL CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 910 162 PDF CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 910 165 PJL CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 910 166 IPDS CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 910 167 MediaPrint JPEG CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 7 910 168 MediaPrint TIFF CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 910 169 XPS CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 910 180 FONT CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 910 181 FONT1 CTL 0 to 0 0...

Page 733: ... 601 only 7 910 210 MIB CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 910 211 Websupport CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 910 212 WebUapl CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 7 910 213 SDK1 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 910 214 SDK2 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 910 215 SDK3 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 910 250 Package CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 7911 Firmware Version 7 911 001 System Copy CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 911 002 Engine CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7...

Page 734: ... 0 0 step 7 911 159 PCLXL CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 911 162 PDF CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 911 165 PJL CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 911 166 IPDS CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 911 167 MediaPrint JPEG CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 7 911 168 MediaPrint TIFF CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 911 169 XPS CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 911 180 FONT CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 911 181 FONT1 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 911 182 FONT2 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 ...

Page 735: ...0 0 0 step 7 911 205 Scanner CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 7 911 206 RFax CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 7 911 210 MIB CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 911 211 Websupport CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 911 212 WebUapl CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 only 7 911 213 SDK1 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 911 214 SDK2 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 911 215 SDK3 CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step 7 911 250 Package CTL 0 to 0 0 0 step MP 501 601 o...

Page 736: ...nt server Specifically the following questions can be answered How is the document server actually being used What application is using the document server most frequently What data in the document server is being reused Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation the mode of operation is referred to as an application Before reading the Group 8 Ser...

Page 737: ...r will be discussed case by case O Other applications external network applications for example Refers to network applications such as Web Image Monitor Utilities developed with the SDK Software Development Kit will also be counted with this group in the future The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters forced by the necessity of displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that ...

Page 738: ...rint processing i e finishing punching stapling etc Full Bleed No Margins GenCopy Generation Copy Mode GPC Get Print Counter For jobs 10 pages or less this counter does not count up For jobs larger than 10 pages this counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10 e g for an 11 page job the counter counts up 11 10 1 IFax Internet Fax ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the cop...

Page 739: ...nd converted to different formats PC Personal Computer PGS Pages A page is the total scanned surface of the original Duplex pages count as two pages and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3 DLT counter SP is switched ON PJob Print Jobs Ppr Paper PrtJam Printer plotter Jam PrtPGS Print Pages R Red Toner Remaining Applies to the wide format model A2 only This machine is under development and curr...

Page 740: ...r of pages processed When an application is opened for image input or output this counts as one job Interrupted jobs paper jams etc are counted even though they do not finish Only jobs executed by the customer are counted Jobs executed by the customer engineer using the SP modes are not counted When using secure printing when a password is required to start the print job the job is counted at the ...

Page 741: ...for example the O counter increments However for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application the F counter increments 8011 T Jobs LS CTL These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the document server by each application to reveal how local storage is being used for input 0 to 99999999 0 1 step The L counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document server mode scree...

Page 742: ... scanned from within document server mode then the L counter increments When images stored on the document server by a network application including Palm 2 are printed with another application the O counter increments When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application Web Image Monitor for example the C counter increments When a fax on the document server is printe...

Page 743: ...n images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as an e mail the O counter increments 8051 T TX Jobs DesApl CTL These SPs count the applications used to send files from the document server over the telephone line or over a network attached to an e mail or as a fax image by I Fax Jobs merged for sending are counted separately 0 to 99999999 0 1 step The L counter co...

Page 744: ... jobs are not available at this time 8066 L FIN Jobs CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel The finishing method is specified from the print window within document server mode 8067 O FIN Jobs CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external applicati...

Page 745: ... Bind Not used 806x 014 Ring Bind Not used 806x 015 3rd Vendor 8071 T Jobs PGS CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the job regardless of which application was used 8072 C Jobs PGS CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job 8073 F Jobs PGS CTL 0 to 99...

Page 746: ...501 to 700 Pages 807x 006 6 to 10 Pages 8 07x 13 701 to 1000 Pages 807x 007 11 to 20 Pages 8 07x 14 More than 1001 Pages For example When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server mode the appropriate L counter SP8076 0xx increments Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F counter SP 8073 Interrupted jobs paper jam etc are counted even though they do ...

Page 747: ...server If the mode is changed during the job the job will count with the mode set when the job started If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I Fax at a destination where both are available then this counter increments and the I Fax counter 8 12x also increments The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending not when the job is sent 8121 T IFAX TX Jobs CTL 0 to ...

Page 748: ... it is determined to be color or black and white then counted If the job is cancelled during scanning or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be sent the job is not counted If the job is cancelled during sending it may or may not be counted depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Rou...

Page 749: ... combined for sending the transmission counts as one job 8151 T Deliv Jobs PC CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count the total number of jobs color or black and white scanned and sent to a folder on a PC Scan to PC Note At the present time 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts 8155 S Deliv Jobs PC CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count the total number of jobs color or black and white s...

Page 750: ...copier 8171 T Deliv Jobs WSD CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by WS 0 to 99999999 0 1 step 8175 S Deliv Jobs WSD CTL 001 B W 002 Color 003 ACS 8181 T Scan to Media Jobs CTL These SPs count the scanned pages in a media by the scanner application 0 to 99999999 0 1 step 8185 S Scan to Media Jobs CTL 001 B W 002 Color 003 ACS 8191 T Total Scan PGS CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by each app...

Page 751: ... large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy jobs Large size paper scanned for fax transmission is not counted Note These counters are displayed in the SMC Report and in the User Tools display 8203 F LSize Scan PGS A3 DLT Larger CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for fax transmission Note These counters are displayed in the SM...

Page 752: ... for front and back side scanning 001 Front Number of front sides fed for scanning With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex scanning With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side scanning The front side is det...

Page 753: ...ser switches from ADF to Platen mode the count is done for the last selected mode The user cannot select mixed sizes or non standard sizes with the fax application so if the original s page sizes are mixed or non standard these are not counted If the user selects Mixed Sizes for copying in the platen mode the Mixed Size count is enabled In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and...

Page 754: ...es 824x 003 Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 824x 004 GenCopy Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes 824x 005 Map Yes Yes No No Yes 824x 006 Normal Detail Yes No Yes No No 824x 007 Fine Super Fine Yes No Yes No No 824x 008 Binary Yes No No Yes No 824x 009 Grayscale Yes No No Yes No 824x 010 Color Yes No No Yes No 824x 011 Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes If the scan mode is changed during the job for example if the user switc...

Page 755: ...Store File button from within the Copy mode screen 8261 T Scn PGS ColCr CTL 8262 C Scn PGS ColCr CTL 8265 S Scn PGS Color CTL 8266 L Scn PGS ColCr CTL Last three digits for SP8 261 262 265 and 266 826x 001 Color Conversion These SPs show how many times color creation features have been selected at the operation panel 826x 002 Color Erase 826x 003 Background 826x 004 Other 8281 T Scan PGS TWAIN CTL...

Page 756: ... scanned by the Copy application Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output printing page size SP 8 442 8303 F Scan PGS Size CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output page size SP 8 443 8305 S Scan PGS Size CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs...

Page 757: ...esolution settings 8315 S Scan PGS Rez CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings Note At the present time SP8 311 and SP8 315 perform identical counts Last three digits for SP8 311 and 315 831x 001 1200 dpi 831x 002 600 dpi to 1199 dpi 831x 003 400 dpi to 599 dpi 831x 004 200 dpi to 399 dp...

Page 758: ...Copy mode screen go to the C counter 8382 C Total PrtPGS CTL 8383 F Total PrtPGS CTL 8384 P Total PrtPGS CTL 8385 S Total PrtPGS CTL 8386 L Total PrtPGS CTL 8387 O Total PrtPGS CTL When several documents are merged for a print job the number of pages stored is counted for the application that stored them These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine so the following ...

Page 759: ...l 0 to 99999999 0 1 step 8402 C PrtPGS LS CTL 8403 F PrtPGS LS CTL 8404 P PrtPGS LS CTL 8405 S PrtPGS LS CTL 8406 L PrtPGS LS CTL Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L count Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F count 8411 Prints Duplex CTL This SP counts the amount of paper front back counted as 1 page used for duplex p...

Page 760: ... by the scanner application 8426 L PrtPGS Dup Comb CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window at the operation panel 8427 O PrtPGS Dup Comb CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by Ot...

Page 761: ...6in1 Magazine 842x 022 8in1 Magazine 842x 023 9in1 Magazine 842x 024 16in1 Magazine These counts SP8 421 to SP8 427 are especially useful for customers who need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption Pages that are only partially printed with the n Up functions are counted as 1 page Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine m...

Page 762: ...w with the print application 8436 L PrtPGS ImgEdt CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below 8437 O PrtPGS ImgEdt CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with Other applications Last three digits for SP8 ...

Page 763: ...Ppr Size CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer application 8445 S PrtPGS Ppr Size CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner application 8446 L PrtPGS Ppr Size CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within the do...

Page 764: ...99 0 1 step These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station 001 Bypass Tray Bypass Tray 002 Tray 1 Machine 003 Tray 2 Paper Tray Unit Option 004 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit Option 005 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit Option 006 Tray 5 Not used 007 Tray 6 Not used 008 Tray 7 Not used 009 Tray 8 Not used 010 Tray 9 Not used 011 Tray10 Not used 012 Tray11 Not used 013 Tray12 Not used 014 Tray1...

Page 765: ... one side counts as 1 8462 C PrtPGS Ppr Type CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy application 8463 F PrtPGS Ppr Type CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax application 8464 P PrtPGS Ppr Type CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer a...

Page 766: ...as Excel are also counted Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document server are not counted Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce Enlarge copying are counted The magnification rates of blank cover sheets slip sheets etc are automatically assigned a rate of 100 8481 T PrtPGS TonSave CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step 8484 P PrtP...

Page 767: ...849x 004 Full Color 849x 051 B W Banner 849x 052 Single Color Banner 849x 053 Two Color Banner 849x 054 Full Color Banner 8501 T PrtPGS Col Mode CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed in the Color Mode by the print application 8504 P PrtPGS Col Mode CTL 8507 O PrtPGS Col Mode CTL Last three digits for SP8 501 504 and 507 850x 001 B W 850x 002 Mono Color 850x 003 Full Color 850x 004 Single...

Page 768: ... pages printed 8514 P PrtPGS Emul CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed Last three digits for SP8 511 and 514 851x 001 RPCS 851x 002 RPDL 851x 003 PS3 851x 004 R98 851x 005 R16 851x 006 GL GL2 851x 007 R55 851x 008 RTIFF 851x 009 PDF 851x 010 PCL5e 5c 851x 011 PCL XL 851x 012 IPDL C 851x 013 BM Links Japan Only 851x 014 Other 851x 01...

Page 769: ...ages printed by the Fax application Note Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available 8524 P PrtPGS FIN CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print application 8525 S PrtPGS FIN CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner application 8526 L Prt...

Page 770: ... amount of staples used 001 or count stapled 002 by the machine 001 Staples CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 002 Stapless CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 8551 T PrtBooks FIN CTL 8552 C PrtBooks FIN CTL 8554 P PrtBooks FIN CTL 8556 L PrtBooks FIN CTL 855x 001 Perfect Bind Not used 855x 002 Ring Bind Not used 8561 T A Sheet Of Paper CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step 8562 C A Sheet Of Paper CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step 8563 F A S...

Page 771: ...the total output broken down by color output regardless of the application used In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine 001 Total 002 Total Full Color 003 B W Single Color 004 Development CMY 005 Development K 006 Copy Color 007 Copy B W 008 Print Color 009 Print B W 010 Total Color 011 Total B W 012 Full Colo...

Page 772: ...28 Development CMY A3 029 Development K A3 030 Total Color A3 031 Total B W A3 032 Total B W A3 8582 C Counter CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by color output 001 B W 002 Single Color 003 Two Color 004 Full Color 8583 F Counter CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by color outp...

Page 773: ...SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color output 001 B W 002 Single Color 003 Two Color 004 Full Color 8591 O Counter CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count the totals for A3 DLT paper use number of duplex pages printed and the number of staples used These totals are for Other O applications only 001 A3 DLT 002 Duplex 005 Banner 8601 T Coverage Counter CTL 0 to 21474...

Page 774: ...ach printing mode 8603 F Coverage Counter CTL 0 to 2147483647 0 1 step These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout pages for each printing mode 8604 P Coverage Counter CTL 0 to 2147483647 0 1 step These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout pages for each printing mode 8606 L Coverage Counter CTL 0 to 2147483647 0 1 step These SPs count the...

Page 775: ... total printout pages for each SDK applicaion 001 SDK 1 002 SDK 2 003 SDK 3 004 SDK 4 005 SDK 5 006 SDK 6 007 SDK 7 008 SDK 8 009 SDK 9 010 SDK 10 011 SDK 11 012 SDK 12 8621 Func Use Counter DFU 001 to 064 Function 001 to Function 064 8631 T FAX TX PGS CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number 8633 F FAX TX PGS CTL 0 to 99999999 ...

Page 776: ...d are counted for each destination 8641 T IFAX TX PGS CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax images using I Fax 8643 F IFAX TX PGS CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax images using I Fax 864x 001 B W 864x 002 Color If a document has color and black and white pages mixed the pages ...

Page 777: ...e sent to the same SMTP server together If Scan to PC is used to send a 10 page document to 5 folders the count is 50 the document is sent to each destination of the SMB FTP server Due to restrictions on some devices if Scan to Email is used to send a 10 page document to a large number of destinations the count may be divided and counted separately For example if a 10 page document is sent to 200 ...

Page 778: ...o PC with the Scan application 867x 001 B W 867x 002 Color 8681 T PCFAX TXPGS CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC Fax These SPs are provided for the Fax application only so the counts for SP8 681 and SP8 683 are the same 0 to 99999999 0 1 step 8683 F PCFAX TXPGS CTL This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application from the PC through the copier to the destination When sen...

Page 779: ... application that stored them When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast the F count is done for the number of pages sent to each destination 8701 TX PGS Port CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send them For example if a 3 page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4 the count for ISDN G3 G4 is 12 001 PSTN 1 002 PSTN 2 00...

Page 780: ...s scanned by each scanner mode 872x 001 B W 872x 002 Color 8731 T Scan PGS Media CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step 8735 S Scan PGS Media CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned and saved in a meia by each scanner mode 873x 001 B W 873x 002 Color 8741 RX PGS Port CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to receive them 001 PSTN 1 002 PSTN 2 ...

Page 781: ...e the same 001 BK The number of black toner bottles 002 Y The number of yellow toner bottles 003 M The number of magenta toner bottles 004 C The number of cyan toner bottles 8791 LS Memory Remain CTL 0 to 100 0 1 This SP displays the percent of space available on the document server for storing documents 001 BK The number of black toner bottles 8801 Toner Remain CTL 0 to 100 0 1 These SPs display ...

Page 782: ...splays the number of pages reduced by using the combine function 008 Duplex CTL 0 to 100 0 1 Displays the utilization ratio of the duplex function 009 Combine CTL 0 to 100 0 1 Displays the utilization ratio of the combine function 010 Paper Cut CTL 0 to 100 0 1 Displays the paper reduction ratio 051 Sync Eco Total CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step 054 Sync Duplex CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step 055 Sync Combi...

Page 783: ... Duplex Last CTL 0 to 100 0 1 159 Sync Combine Last CTL 0 to 100 0 1 160 Sync Paper Cut Last CTL 0 to 100 0 1 8851 CVr Cnt 0 10 CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 0 to 10 011 0 to 2 BK 031 5 to 7 BK 012 0 to 2 Y 032 5 to 7 Y 013 0 to 2 M 033 5 to 7 M 014 0 to 2 C 034 5 to 7 C 021 3 to 4 BK 041 8 to 10 BK 022 3 to 4 ...

Page 784: ...ch the coverage of each color is from 21 to 30 001 BK 002 Y 003 M 004 C 8881 CVr Cnt 31 CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 step These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is 31 or higher 001 BK 002 Y 003 M 004 C 8891 Page Toner Bottle CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 step These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner for each color 001 BK 002 Y 003 M ...

Page 785: ...002 Y 003 M 004 C 8911 Page Toner_Prev2 CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for each color 001 BK 002 Y 003 M 004 C 8921 Cvr Cnt Total CTL 0 to 2147483647 0 1 Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color 001 Coverage BK 002 Coverage Y 003 Coverage M 004 Coverage C 8921 Cvr Cnt Total CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 step 011 Cover...

Page 786: ... time while controller saves data to HDD Does not include time spent in Energy Save Low Power or Off modes 003 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performing background printing 004 Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on Includes time while machine is performing background printing 005 Off Mode Time Includes time while machine is performing background print...

Page 787: ...t Fax relay destination registrations for relay TX 006 F Code F Code box registrations 007 Copy Program Copy application registrations with the Program job settings feature 0 to 255 0 1 step 008 Fax Program Fax application registrations with the Program job settings feature 009 Printer Program Printer application registrations with the Program job settings feature 010 Scanner Program Scanner appli...

Page 788: ...ower Off Count 003 Force Power Off Count 8999 Admin Counter List Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color 001 Total CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 002 Copy Full Color CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 003 Copy BW CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 004 Copy Single Color CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 005 Copy Two Color CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 006 Printer Full Color CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 007 Printer BW CTL 0 to 9999...

Page 789: ...L 0 to 2147483647 0 1 026 Printer Full Color CTL 0 to 2147483647 0 1 027 Printer BW CTL 0 to 2147483647 0 1 028 Printer Single Color CTL 0 to 2147483647 0 1 029 Printer Two Color CTL 0 to 2147483647 0 1 030 Fax Print BW CTL 0 to 2147483647 0 1 031 Fax Print Single Color CTL 0 to 2147483647 0 1 101 Transmission Total Color CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 102 Transmission Total BW CTL 0 to 99999999 0 1 103 FA...

Page 790: ...affect I O Timeouts will never occur bit 4 SD Card Save Mode Disabled Enabled If this BitSwitch is enabled print jobs will be saved to the GW SD slot and not output to paper bit 5 PS and PDF Paper size error margin 5pt 10pt When a PS job is printed by using a custom paper size the job might not be printed because of a paper size mismatch caused by a calculation error By default the error margin fo...

Page 791: ...ms submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e c If Auto PDL switching is disabled these jobs will not be printed properly bit 4 Not used bit 5 DFU bit 6 Not used bit 7 DFU 1001 Bit Switch 003 Bit Switch 3 0 1 bit 0 to 1 DFU bit 2 PCL5e c Legacy HP compatibility Disabled Enabled Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000 HP8000 In other words the left margin defined in the job usua...

Page 792: ...d Single copy Enabled Multiple copy If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies only a single copy is output by default Using this BitSwitch the device can be configured to print all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs bit 2 Prevent SDK applications from altering the contents of a job Disabled Enabled If this BitSwitch is enabled SDK applications will not be a...

Page 793: ...f this is enabled the max will be raised to 750 or 1000 depending on the model bit 5 Not used bit 6 Method for determining the image rotation for the edge to bind on Disabled Enabled If enabled the image rotation will be performed as they were in the specifications of older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation jobs The old models are below PCL Pre 04A models PS PDF RPCS Pre 05S mod...

Page 794: ... Not used bit 7 DFU 1001 Bit Switch 007 Bit Switch 7 0 1 bit 0 Not used bit 1 to 7 DFU 1001 Bit Switch 008 Bit Switch 8 0 1 bit 0 to 2 DFU bit 3 Not used bit 4 to 5 DFU bit 6 PCL RPCS PS Forced BW print Enabled Disabled Switches whether to ignore PDL color command MP 501 601 Only bit 7 Not used 1001 Bit Switch 009 Bit Switch 9 0 1 ...

Page 795: ...printing under the following conditions might result in problems Job submission via USB or Parallel Port Spool printing WIM Configuration Device Settings System bit 3 Not used bit 4 Timing of the PJL Status ReadBack JOB END when printing multiple collated copies Disabled Enabled This BitSwitch determines the timing of the PJL USTATUS JOB END sent when multiple collated copies are being printed 0 d...

Page 796: ... are specified queue names are sent bit 7 Enable Disable Print from USB SD s Preview function Enabled Disabled Determines whether Print from USB SD will have the Preview function MP 501 601 Only Enabled 0 Print from USB SD will have the Preview function Disabled 1 Print from USB SD will not have the Preview function 1001 Bit Switch 010 Bit Switch A 0 1 bit 0 to 4 DFU bit 5 Store and Skip Errored J...

Page 797: ... pages will be canceled This setting will prevent the next user from printing the unnecessary pages from the previous user s print job MP 501 601 Only 1001 Bit Switch 011 Bit Switch B 0 1 bit 0 Show Menu List Hide Menu List Show Menu List If this is 0 the Menu List button will be removed from Printer Features MP 501 601 Only bit 1 Print job interruption Does not allow interruption Allow interrupti...

Page 798: ...than the Bypass Tray matches the job s paper size and type but has run out of paper printing will stop and an alert will appear on the LCD screen stating that the tray has run out of paper This prevents unexpected use of the Bypass Tray Limitations when this BitSwitch is set to 1 The Paper Tray Priority Printer setting must be configured to a tray other than the Bypass Tray Jobs that contain more ...

Page 799: ... the user ID type displayed on the operation panel Disabled Enabled As of 15S models the Login User Name can be displayed on the operation panel The user ID type displayed on the operation panel can be changed by configuring BitSwitch 12 5 as follows 0 default Login User Name 1 User ID If this is enabled User ID will be displayed which is equivalent to the behavior exhibited in 14A and earlier mod...

Page 800: ... controller firmware SP 5300 5310 only 1005 002 Printer Version Displays the version of the controller firmware MP 501 601 only 1006 MP 501 601 only Sample Locked Print 1006 001 0 Link with Doc Srv 1 Enable 1007 SP 5300 5310 only Supply Display 1007 001 Development Enables or disables the display for information on each consumable supply 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 1007 002 PCU 1007 003 Transfer 10...

Page 801: ...etting Enable or disable the media print support function 1110 002 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 to 1 1 1 step 1111 MP 501 601 only All Job Delete Mode Selects whether to include an image processing job in jobs subject to full cancellation from the SCS job list 1111 001 0 excluding New Job 1 including New Job 0 or 1 1 1 step ...

Page 802: ...te scan disable 1 009 001 0 Enable 1 Disable CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 1010 Non Display ClearLight PDF 1 010 001 0 Display 1 Nondisplay CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 1011 Org Count Disp 1 011 001 0 ON 1 OFF CTL 0 or 1 0 1 step 1012 UserInfo Release 1 012 001 0 No 1 Yes CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 1013 Scan to Media Device Setting 1 013 002 0 OFF 1 ON CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 1014 Scan to Folder Pass Input Set 1 014 001 0 OFF ...

Page 803: ...ression Level Grayscale 2 021 001 Comp1 5 95 CTL 5 to 95 20 1 step 2 021 002 Comp2 5 95 CTL 5 to 95 40 1 step 2 021 003 Comp3 5 95 CTL 5 to 95 65 1 step 2 021 004 Comp4 5 95 CTL 5 to 95 80 1 step 2 021 005 Comp5 5 95 CTL 5 to 95 95 1 step 2023 ClearLightPDF ACS Setting 2 023 001 0 OFF 1 ON CTL 0 or 1 1 1 step 2024 Compression ratio of ClearLightPDF 2 024 001 Compression Ratio Normal CTL 5 to 95 25...

Page 804: ...0 2 025 001 Compression Ratio Normal JPEG2000 CTL 5 to 95 25 1 step 2 025 002 Compression Ratio High JPEG2000 CTL 5 to 95 15 1 step 2030 OCR PDF DetectSens 2 030 001 White Lumi Value 0 255 CTL 0 to 255 250 1 step 2 030 002 White Pix Ratio 0 100 CTL 0 to 100 80 1 step 2 030 003 White Tile Ratio 0 100 CTL 0 to 100 80 1 step ...

Page 805: ...r 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 SP Description Reading 0 1 5 803 001 Exit Full Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 5 803 016 Key Card Set Set Not set 5 803 017 Key Counter Set Set Not set 5 803 018 IPU Version 3 14 2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE SP5 804 Activates the electrical components for functional check It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same time SP Displ...

Page 806: ......

Page 807: ...SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 808: ......

Page 809: ...ut for a device of the same product pop up messages will not appear because the devices are recognized as having the same serial number Level 2 If SP5 844 005 is set to Level 2 a common serial number for all GW GW models is sent to the computer As a result if a GW GW device is swapped out for a different GW GW device pop up messages will not appear because the devices are both recognized as being ...

Page 810: ... each page can be searched for triggers 3 PS interpreter It can detect PCL5 triggers in PS data If a PCL trigger is detected the PS interpreter will abort processing and return the unprocessed part of the job back to the printer system The entire page regardless of the number of bytes is searched for triggers 2 and 3 can be disabled using Printer Bit Switch 2 3 1 If the Printer Language is configu...

Page 811: ...ion switching are performed 1 PDL selection PCL5 or PS including PDF at the beginning of the job performed by the printer system 2 PDL switching from PCL5 to PS performed by the PCL interpreter and the printer system 3 PDL switching from PS to PCL5 performed by the PS interpreter and the printer system Triggers Printer system ...

Page 812: ...erdict is excluded by configuring Printer Bit Switch 5 3 1 Up to 2KB from the start of the job can be searched for triggers can be added to the PS triggers by configuring Printer Bit Switch 5 3 1 If a job is identified as PDF it will be sent to the PS interpreter to be processed as a regular PS job PS interpreter PCL5 trigger ESC E and 2 or more continuous PCL commands Up to 256 bytes from the sta...

Page 813: ...riggers used by the printer system BitSW 5 3 0 default is not used as a printer system PS trigger will not call the PS interpreter BitSW 5 3 1 is used as a printer system PS trigger The reason that is not included as a trigger by default is that a string of text in the body of the job such as the below could result in a false positive This would trigger a switch and result garbled output However s...

Page 814: ...es PCL PS PDF or RPCS print images BitSW 5 6 0 default A uniform binding edge short or long edge will be applied to every page of every job Pages will always be rotated as if they were to be bound on that edge BitSW 5 6 1 A uniform binding edge short or long edge will only be applied if the job is stapled punched or Z folded Otherwise the bound edge might differ from page to page Example A 3 page ...

Page 815: ...rotates PCL PS PDF or RPCS print images 1 The page count for a single copy is returned after the first copy is printed 2 The page count for the rest of the copies excluding the first copy is returned after all copies have been printed 3 This emulates an older HP PCL firmware spec It is only needed for compatibility with legacy software BitSw 9 4 1 The page count for all copies is output after all ...

Page 816: ...TUS PAGE 2 PJL USTATUS PAGE 3 PJL USTATUS PAGE 4 PJL USTATUS PAGE 5 PJL USTATUS PAGE 6 comment The page count of the remaining two copies is returned comment 9 4 1 PJL USTATUS JOB START NAME Microsoft Word TEST_page1 3 PJL USTATUS PAGE 1 PJL USTATUS PAGE 2 PJL USTATUS PAGE 3 PJL USTATUS PAGE 4 PJL USTATUS PAGE 5 PJL USTATUS PAGE 6 PJL USTATUS PAGE 7 PJL USTATUS PAGE 8 PJL USTATUS PAGE 9 ...

Page 817: ...Printing Features SM Appendix 4 9 D255 D256 M281 M282 Software Configuration PJL USTATUS JOB END NAME Microsoft Word TEST_page1 3 PAGES 9 comment The page count of all three copies is returned comment ...

Page 818: ...not clear This will cause all of the following to be cleared after the scanning is complete Destination Sender Email subject Email message File name Scanner SP 1 012 001 1 default Exceptions User Auth If SP 1 012 001 0 and if User Auth excluding User Code authentication is enabled the most recently used scan destination will only be retained until the user logs out Scanner Auto Reset timer Even if...

Page 819: ...er It is an SMTP command sent at the beginning of the email transmission process 2 The sender s address in the mail header From field This appears as From in email clients It is a part of the email itself 3 The email address corresponding to the SMTP username used to login into the SMTP server When the MFP logins into the SMTP server the email address of the username 3 will be compared to 1 and 2 ...

Page 820: ...m field administrator Fig 3 3 The SMTP username device Fig 1 1 2 and 3 must match and the authentication should be successful The user s email address will still be inserted into the reply to field Fig 1 Default device SMTP username password and email address Fig 2 A user s email address in the Address Book Fig 3 Administrator s email address ...

Page 821: ...ry Either enabled or disabled The user s account B Destination list disabled The recipient s account as configured in the Address Book s Folder Authentication setting C enabled If SP 5 846 021 0 default The authenticated user s account 1 The recipient s account as configured in the Address Book s Folder Authentication setting The user s account will be either the one entered during scanning see th...

Page 822: ...Scanner Features MP 501 601 Only D255 D256 M281 M282 4 14 SM Appendix Case B or Case C with SP 1 All access will be logged as the same user ...

Page 823: ...en the above SP mode SP5 967 001 is OFF 1 both the Document Server and Locked Print functions will be disabled How to Use Locked Print When the Document Server Is Disabled 1 Enter Printer SP mode 2 Set SP1 006 001 to 1 0 Link with Doc Srv default Locked print will only be enabled if the document server is enabled 1 Enable Enable Locked Print will be enabled no matter the status of the document ser...

Page 824: ... TO THE DOCUMENT SERVER MP 501 601 ONLY System Copier SP 5 885 020 bit 0 1 and 7 restrict Web Image Monitor access to the DS It disables the following WIM settings The entire Document Server menu shown in blue in fig1 Job Document Server shown in red in fig1 See the following for details Bit 0 Bit 0 0 default Allows anyone guests users admins access to the DS via WIM Bit 0 1 Prevents everyone from...

Page 825: ...gurations will take priority So for example Bit 0 0 Bit 1 1 Bit 7 1 As Bit 1 1 is the most restrictive of the three it will take presedence over the other two and only administrators will be able to access the DS via WIM In order for SP5 885 020 to have any effect the Document Server must be enabled SP5 967 001 0 For information about SP5 967 001 refer to Disabling the Document Server using System...

Page 826: ...ations SP 5 420 User Authentication Value Default 0 SP5 420 001 Copy 0 ON 1 OFF SP5 420 011 Document Server SP5 420 021 Fax SP5 420 031 Scanner SP5 420 041 Printer 1 Enable User Authentication for the device as a whole User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools User Authentication Management 2 Use the SP5 420 settings to specify the applications to which User authentication is to apply ...

Page 827: ...D255 D256 FAX OPTION REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 67 10 19 2016 Removed Bit Switch 1 G3 Communication Parameter Resol 44 ...

Page 828: ......

Page 829: ...dition for remote machine 9 2 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 10 2 1 FCU 10 2 1 1 SRAM DATA TRANSFER PROCEDURE 10 When replacing the Fax modular cable 21 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 22 3 1 ERROR CODES 22 3 1 1 ERROR CODES 22 3 2 FAX CONNECTION UNIT ERROR CODES 45 3 2 1 FAX CONNECTION UNIT ERROR CODE LIST 45 MACHINE_ERR_01 45 MACHINE_ERR_02 45 MACHINE_ERR_03 46 MACHINE_ERR_04 46 MACHINE_ERR_05 46 MACHINE_ERR_06 4...

Page 830: ...61 4 1 5 SP5 XXX RAM CLEAR 61 4 1 6 SP6 XXX REPORTS 62 4 1 7 SP7 XXX TESTS 64 4 2 BIT SWITCHES 1 65 4 2 1 SYSTEM SWITCHES 65 4 3 BIT SWITCHES 2 80 4 3 1 I FAX SWITCHES 80 4 3 2 PRINTER SWITCHES 87 4 4 BIT SWITCHES 3 95 4 4 1 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES 95 4 5 BIT SWITCHES 4 105 4 5 1 G3 SWITCHES 105 4 6 BIT SWITCHES 5 115 4 6 1 IP FAX SWITCHES 115 4 7 NCU PARAMETERS 124 4 8 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAM...

Page 831: ...UNICATION 155 Mail Transmission 155 Data Formats 155 Direct SMTP Transmission 156 Selectable Options 156 Secure Internet Transmission 156 Mail Reception 157 POP3 IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure 157 SMTP Reception 157 Mail Delivery Conditions Transferring Mail Received With SMTP 157 Auth E mail RX 158 Handling Mail Reception Errors 158 Remaining SAF capacity error 159 Secure Internet Reception 159 T...

Page 832: ...HAT IS IP FAX 164 5 5 2 T 38 PACKET FORMAT 164 UDP Related Switches 164 5 5 3 SETTINGS 164 6 SPECIFICATIONS 165 6 1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 165 6 1 1 FCU 165 6 1 2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS 166 6 2 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS 167 6 3 IP FAX SPECIFICATIONS 168 6 4 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION 169 ...

Page 833: ... of those symbols and abbreviations are as follows Symbol What it means Clip ring Screw Connector Clamp E ring Spring Flat Flexible Cable Timing Belt SEF Short Edge Feed A LEF Long Edge Feed B Cautions Notes etc The following headings provide special information Failure to obey warning information could result in serious injury or death ...

Page 834: ...damage to originals loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine Always obey these guidelines to avoid serious problems such as misfeeds damage to originals loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine bold is added for emphasis This document provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine ...

Page 835: ...nts Up to six machines can be registered as the client machines Machines that have the fax unit installed cannot be used as the client machine Only one machine can be registered as the Remote Machine Firmware for this unit aics software number D3CP5759 Remote Fax transmissions are possible on a G3 line The remote fax function does not support User Code Authentication Disable the User Code Authenti...

Page 836: ...e Installing the fax connection unit Before starting this procedure connect the network cable to the target machine s and then configure the network settings When installing more than one SD card perform the merge operation For details about how to merge refer to SD Card Appli Move in Main Chapters of the field service manual 1 Turn OFF the main power 2 Open the rear upper cover A 3 Insert a flath...

Page 837: ...eful not to damage the hooks at the rear of the controller cover when you remove or install the controller cover 5 Insert the Fax Connection Unit Type M24 SD card into SD card slot 1 A upper slot 6 Reassemble the machine 7 Turn ON the main power 8 Press Firmware Version in the Administrator Tools ...

Page 838: ...chine Otherwise registering the remote machine fails Before starting this procedure connect the network cable to the target machine s and then configure the network settings 1 On the remote machine press the User Tools icon on the operation panel 2 Press Machine Features 3 Press System Settings 4 Press Administrator Tools 5 Press Program Change Delete Remote Machine 6 Press Not Programmed and then...

Page 839: ...ION 7 Press Connection Test to check the connection with the client machine If an error message is displayed check the network connection with the client machine and make sure that the IP address of the client machine is correct 8 Press OK after Connection Test has been successfully done ...

Page 840: ...ss User Tools icon on the operation panel 2 Press Machine Features 3 Press System Settings 4 Press Administrator Tools 5 Press Program Change Delete Remote Machine 6 Press Not Programmed and then enter the IP address or host name of o the remote machine Only one machine can be registered as the remote machine 7 Press Connection Test to check the connection with the remote machine If an error messa...

Page 841: ...te machine the client machines can send faxes via the remote machine The procedures shown below are necessary to enable the client machines to receive faxes 1 If you use Remote Reception Setting per Line 1 On the remote machine press User Tools icon on the operation panel 2 Press Facsimile Features in Machine Features 3 Press Remote Reception Setting per Line in Reception Settings 4 Enter an IP ad...

Page 842: ... 07 D255 D256 FAX OPTION 8 SM 4 Select the Special Sender 5 Press Remote Reception Setting per Sender 6 Press On 7 Press Remote Machine 8 Enter an IP address or a host name of the client machine to connect 9 Press OK to exit from the setting ...

Page 843: ...nel The Remote Fax icon is supposed to appear automatically on the home screen of the client machine s after installing the Remote Fax Function If the icon does not appear perform the procedure below to add the Remote Fax icon manually 1 Press the application list icon in the home screen 2 Press APPS tab 3 Press and hold down the Remote Fax icon from the list 4 Drag the icon to where you want to p...

Page 844: ...ing procedure to back up the SRAM data The following data can be transferred TTI RTI CSI Fax bit switch settings RAM address settings NCU parameter settings 1 Open the rear upper cover A 2 Insert a flathead screwdriver into A to release a hook of the controller cover B 3 Release the hook by opening the right side of the cover as shown below and then remove the cover A by rotating it in the directi...

Page 845: ...he hooks on the inside of the controller cover when you remove or install the controller cover 4 Insert a flathead screwdriver in the order of and to release three hooks 5 Remove the rear left stay A Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear left stay when you ...

Page 846: ...FCU D255 D256 FAX OPTION 12 SM remove or install the rear left stay 6 Disconnect the connector of the speaker 7 Remove the fax unit A 8 Remove the bracket A from the fax unit B ...

Page 847: ...TION 9 Disconnect the connector 10 Remove the FCU board A 11 Change the orientation of the battery jumper switch A on the removed FCU board B and then attach the battery jumper switch C The battery jumper switch C is provided with the new FCU board ...

Page 848: ...the orientation of the battery jumper switch A on the new FCU board B If the battery jumper switch is not in the correct position SC820 will occur 13 Install the new FCU board to the fax unit 1 Attach the two brackets A to the new FCU board B ...

Page 849: ...55 D256 FAX OPTION 2 Connect the connector 3 Attach the bracket A 14 Attach the flat cable A to CN603 of the new fax unit Make sure that the blue tape of the flat cable faces outward 15 Remove the cap A from the controller box cover B ...

Page 850: ...er A 17 Remove the controller box cover A 18 Install the new fax unit A to the main machine When installing the new fax unit A be careful not to damage the flat cable B After installing the new fax unit A pull out the flat cable B from the main machine as ...

Page 851: ...ission is completed you will hear a beeper sound The beeper sound is at the same volume as the speaker sound The beeper sounds even if the speaker sound is turned off If the beeper does not sound repeat the main power OFF ON until the beeper sounds and then perform the transmission procedure If the data cannot be transmitted repeat transmission 2 or 3 times If the beeper does not sound after turni...

Page 852: ...ly 22 When the message Ready is displayed on the operation panel turn the main power OFF 23 Disconnect the flat cable A from the removed FCU board B 24 Disconnect the connector of the speaker 25 Remove the new FCU board A from the main machine 26 Reattach the controller box cover A ...

Page 853: ... D255 D256 FAX OPTION D255 D256 FAX OPTION The screw B is a small screw Be careful not to use the wrong screw 27 Reattach the slot cover A 28 Reattach the cap A 29 Install the new fax unit A to the main machine ...

Page 854: ...e SP6 101 to print the system parameter list 33 Check the system parameter list to make sure that the data is transferred correctly 34 Set the correct date and time from the User Tools User Tools Machine Features System Settings Timer Setting Set Date Time If any of the SRAM data was not transferred input those settings manually ...

Page 855: ... you replace the Fax modular cable attach the ferrite core with the following procedure 1 Make three loops 5 cm 2 0 inches A from the end of the modular cable connection side to the machine and attach the ferrite core to the loops as shown 2 Fix the modular cable with the bind A as shown below ...

Page 856: ...eport Code Meaning Suggested Cause Action 0 00 DIS NSF not detected within 40 s of Start being pressed Check the connection The other party may be incompatible Replace the FCU Check for DIS NSF with an oscilloscope If the RX signal is weak there may be a bad connection 0 01 DCN received unexpectedly The other party is out of paper or has a paper jam The other party pressed Stop during communicatio...

Page 857: ...TX level NCU Parameter 01 PSTN Cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN Dedicated TX parameters in Service Program Mode 0 05 Modem training fails even G3 shifts down to 2400 bps Check the connection Try adjusting the TX level and or cable equalizer Replace the FCU Check for line problems Reference See error code 0 04 0 06 The other terminal did not reply to DCS Check the connection Try adjusting the TX l...

Page 858: ...errors Check the connection Replace the FCU The other party may have a paper jam or run out of paper or memory space Try adjusting the TX level and or cable equalizer settings The other party may have a defective modem FCU try sending to another machine Check for line problems and noise Reference TX level NCU Parameter 01 PSTN Cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN Dedicated TX parameters in Service Pr...

Page 859: ...s The other machine may have disconnected or it may be defective Try sending to another machine If the RX signal level is too low there may be a line problem Reference See error code 0 08 0 17 Communication was interrupted by pressing Stop If Stop was not pressed and this error keeps occurring replace the operation panel or the operation panel drive board 0 20 Facsimile data not received within 6 ...

Page 860: ...k the connection Replace the FCU The remote machine may be defective Check for line noise or other line problems Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop time Reference Acceptable modem carrier drop time G3 Switch 0A Bits 0 and 1 0 23 Too many errors during reception Check the connection Replace the FCU The remote machine may be defective Check for line noise or other line problems Try aski...

Page 861: ...d during communication Check the connection Retry communication 0 55 FCU does not detect the SG3 FCU firmware or board defective SG3 firmware or board defective 0 56 The stored message data exceeds the capacity of the mailbox in the SG3 SG3 firmware or board defective 0 70 The communication mode specified in CM JM was not available V 8 calling and called terminal The other terminal did not have a ...

Page 862: ...ise etc A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot pass JM to the other party Check the connection and condition Try receiving a call from another V 8 V 34 fax 0 79 The called terminal detected CI while waiting for a V 21 signal Check for line noise or other line problems If this error occurs the called terminal falls back to T 30 mode 0 80 The line was disconnected due to a timeout in V 34 phase ...

Page 863: ... disconnected due to abnormal signaling in V 34 control channel restart The signal did not stop within 10 s Turn OFF the main power and then turn it back ON If the same error is frequent replace the FCU 0 86 The line was disconnected because the other terminal requested a data rate using MPh that was not available in the currently selected symbol rate The other terminal was incompatible Ask the ot...

Page 864: ... the main power and then turn it back ON 2 24 JBIG ASIC error Turn OFF the main power and then turn it back ON 2 25 JBIG data reconstruction error BIH error JBIG data error Check the sender s JBIG function Update the FCU ROM 2 26 JBIG data reconstruction error Float marker error 2 27 JBIG data reconstruction error End marker error 2 28 JBIG data reconstruction error Timeout 2 29 JBIG trailing edge...

Page 865: ...es the same and or the CSIs programmed correctly and then resend The machine at the other party may be defective 5 00 Data reconstruction not possible Replace the FCU 5 10 DCR timer expired Replace the FCU 5 20 Storage impossible because of a lack of memory Temporary memory shortage Test the SAF memory 5 21 Memory overflow 5 23 Print data error when printing a substitute RX or confidential RX mess...

Page 866: ... PPS NULL The other party pressed Stop during communication The other terminal may be defective 6 09 G3 ECM ERR received Check for a noisy line Adjust the TX levels of the communicating machines See code 6 05 6 10 G3 ECM error frames still received at the other party after all communication attempts at 2400 bps Check for line noise Adjust the TX level use NCU parameter 01 or the dedicated TX param...

Page 867: ...protocol setting IP address of the device is not registered 13 26 Network I F setting error at power on Active protocol setting does not match the I F setting for SIP server IP address of the device is not registered 13 27 IP address setting error IP address of the device is not registered 14 00 SMTP Send Error Error occurred during sending to the SMTP server Occurs for any error other than 14 01 ...

Page 868: ...ed SMTP server operating incorrectly Contact the system administrator to determine if there is a problem with the SMTP server and to check that the SMTP server settings are correct Folder send destination is incorrect Contact the system administrator to determine that the SMTP server settings and path to the server are correct Device settings incorrect Confirm that the user name and password setti...

Page 869: ...e target destination for SMTP direct sending Contact the system administrator Check the amount of space remaining on the target HDD or check if the mail size setting is the default value 2MB Check the size of the original data For example if the original has too many pages the data size can be too big to send 14 06 User Not Found on SMTP Server 551 The designated user does not exist The designated...

Page 870: ...he transmission could not be completed Buffer is full due to using Scan to Email while the buffer is being used send mail at the same time 14 12 Data Size Too Large Transmission was cancelled because the detected size of the file was too large 14 13 Send Cancelled Processing is interrupted because the user pressed Stop 14 14 Security Locked File Error Update the software because of the defective s...

Page 871: ...rect user certificate and device certificate 14 30 MCS File Creation Failed Failed to create the MCS file because The number of files created with other applications on the Document Server has exceeded the limit HDD is full or not operating correctly Software error 14 31 UFS File Creation Failed UFS file could not be created Not enough space in UFS area to handle both Scan to Email and IFAX transm...

Page 872: ...d The address book was being edited The number for the specified destination does not exist it was deleted or edited after the job was created 14 60 Send Cancel Failed The cancel operation by the user failed 14 61 Notification Mail Send Failed for All Destinations All addresses for return notification mail failed 14 62 Transmission Error due to the existence of zero line page When the 0 line page ...

Page 873: ...heck if the destination folder works normally Check if the settings of the destination folder are correct Ask an administrator of the direct SMTP server in which the data is supposed to be transferred Check if the destination SMTP server works normally Check if the settings of the destination SMTP server are correct 15 01 POP3 IMAP4 Server Not Registered At startup the system detected that the IP ...

Page 874: ...ceived due to insufficient buffer space The buffer is being used for mail send or Scan to Email 15 14 Mail Header Format Error The mail header is not standard format For example the Date line description is incorrect 15 15 Mail Divide Error The e mail is not in standard format There is no boundary between parts of the e mail including the header 15 16 Mail Size Receive Error The mail cannot be rec...

Page 875: ...ormat error in the address of the Off Ramp Gateway 15 44 Addresses Over The number of addresses for the Off Ramp Gateway exceeded the limit of 30 15 61 Attachment File Format Error The attached file is not TIFF format 15 62 TIFF File Compatibility Error Could not receive transmission due to Resolution error Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi without extended memory Resolution is not supporte...

Page 876: ...here is a problem with the firmware 15 80 Mail Job Task Read Error Could not receive the transmission because the destination buffer is full and the destination could not be created this error may occur when receiving a transfer request or a request for notification of reception 15 81 Repeated Destination Registration Error Could not repeat receive the transmission because the destination buffer i...

Page 877: ...n was unavailable 16 00 No IP address registered The machine does not get an IP address because the DNS server has not been registered for the remote machine or IP address of the remote machine has not been registered Register the DNS server for the remote machine or configure an IP address of the remote machine 22 00 Original length exceeded the maximum scan length Divide the original into more t...

Page 878: ... data in the SAF Update the ROM Replace the FCU 22 05 No G3 parameter confirmation answer Defective FCU board or firmware 23 00 Data read timeout during construction Restart the machine Replace the FCU 25 00 The machine software resets itself after a fatal transmission error occurred Update the ROM Replace the FCU F0 xx V 34 modem error Replace the FCU F6 xx SG3 modem error Update the SG3 modem RO...

Page 879: ...is disconnected because of no response within a specified time 01 14 Either this machine or the machine at the other party has entered SP mode or Initial settings An established connection exists Exit SP mode or initial settings Wait until the connection has finished MACHINE_ERR_02 Error Code Possible Causes Troubleshooting Procedures 02 5 Wrong IP address host name was used The main power of the ...

Page 880: ...nd remote machines as follows Client Machine Remote Machine OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON MACHINE_ERR_04 Error Code Possible Causes Troubleshooting Procedures 04 Although the same user is registered on the remote machine and client machine the user name and login password do not match Register the same user to both the remote machine and client machine Make sure to match the username and login password MAC...

Page 881: ... client machine On the client machine execute SP5 801 021 to clear AICS memory MACHINE_ERR_08 Error Code Possible Causes Troubleshooting Procedures 08 1 A client machine connects to another client machine The client machine is not registered on the remote machine as destinations Connect to the remote machine Register the client machine to the remote machine as a destination 08 2 A remote machine c...

Page 882: ...LAN can communicate through the LAN Between IFAX and PC 1 Network settings on the PC Check the network settings on the PC Check with the network administrator for the IP address Is the IP address registered in the TCP IP properties in the network setup correct 2 Check that PC can connect with the machine Use the ping command on the PC to contact the machine At the MS DOS prompt type ping then the ...

Page 883: ...er Check that the account and password stored in the server are the same as in the machine Ask the administrator to check 3 E mail server Make sure that the client devices which have an account in the server can send receive e mail Ask the administrator to check Send a test e mail with the machine s own number as the destination The machine receives the returned e mail if the communication is perf...

Page 884: ...essfully 3 Destination e mail address Make sure that the e mail address is actually used Check that the e mail address contains no incorrect characters such as spaces 4 Router settings Use the ping command to contact the router Check that other devices connected to the router can sent data over the router Ask the administrator of the server to check 5 Error message by e mail from the network of th...

Page 885: ... of local machine registered Register the IP address 6 Remote terminal port number setting other than 1720 when using H 323 or 5060 when using SIP Send by specifying the port number 7 Specified port number correct Confirm the port number of the remote fax 8 DNS server registered when host name specified Contact the network administrator 9 Remote fax a T 38 terminal Check whether the remote fax is ...

Page 886: ...e 6 Number of the specified fax correct Check the remote fax number 7 Firewall NAT installed The firewall cannot be breached Send by another method Fax Internet Fax 8 Transmission sent manually Manual sending not supported 9 IP address of local fax registered Register the IP address 10 DNS registered when host name specified Contact the network administrator 11 Remote fax a G3 fax Check that the r...

Page 887: ... administrator 7 IP address host name of Gatekeeper SIP server correct Check the IP address host name 8 DNS server registered when Gatekeeper SIP server host name specified Contact the network administrator 9 Enable H 323 Enable SIP SW is set to on Check the settings See User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0 SW 34 Bit 1 10 IP address of local fax registered Register the IP address of the local fax 11 Alias n...

Page 888: ... breached Send by another method Fax Internet Fax 3 IP address of local fax registered Register the IP address 4 Port number specified at remote sender fax if required Request the sender to specify the port number 5 Specified port number correct if required Request the sender to check the port number 6 DNS server registered when host name specified on sender side Contact the network administrator ...

Page 889: ... ON Contact the network administrator 5 IP address host name of specified VoIP Gateway correct on sender s side Request the remote fax to check the IP address host name 6 DNS server registered when host name specified on sender side Contact the network administrator 7 Network bandwidth too narrow Request the network administrator to increase the bandwidth 8 G3 fax connected Check that G3 fax is co...

Page 890: ...e displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model 6 DNS server registered when Gatekeeper SIP server host name specified on sender s side Contact the network administrator The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model 7 Enable H 323 Enable SIP SW set to on Request the sender to check the settings User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0 SW 34 Bit 1 Only if the re...

Page 891: ... OPTION 11 Remote fax cancelled transmission Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission 12 Local fax registered in Gatekeeper SIP server Contact the network administrator The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model ...

Page 892: ...x settings for the fax option Refer to page 80 Bit Switches 2 I Fax Switches 103 Printer Switch 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax option Refer to page 80 Bit Switches 2 Printer Switches 104 Communication Switch 001 032 00 1F Change the bit switches for communication settings for the fax option Refer to page 95 Bit Switches 3 Communication Switches 105 G3 1 Swit...

Page 893: ...tches 4 1 2 SP2 XXX RAM 2 Mode No Function 101 RAM Read Write 001 Change RAM data for the fax board directly Refer to page 136 Service RAM Addresses 102 Memory Dump 001 G3 1 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the fax board Refer to page 136 Service RAM Addresses 103 G3 1 NCU Parameters 001 023 CC 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the standard G3 board Refer to page 124 NCU Parameters ...

Page 894: ...e machine is installed on a PABX line select PABX PABX GND or PABX FLASH 002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3 1 line 003 Memory Lock Disabled Not used 107 IPFAX Port Settings 001 H323 Port Sets the H323 port number 002 SIP Port Sets the SIP port number 003 RAS Port Sets the RAS port number 004 Gatekeeper port Sets the Gatekeeper port number 005 T 38 Port Sets the T 38 por...

Page 895: ...R 5 Mode No Function 101 Initialize SRAM except Secure 000 Initializes the bit switches and user parameters user data in the SRAM files in the SAF memory and clock 102 Erase All Files 000 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory 103 Reset Bit Switches except Secure 000 Resets the bit switches and user parameters 104 Factory Setting 000 Resets the bit switches and user parameters user data in the ...

Page 896: ... monitor report 103 G3 Protocol Dump List 002 G3 1 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the G3 1 line 003 G3 1 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the G3 1 line 105 All Files print out 000 Prints out all the user files in the SAF memory including confidential messages Do not use this function unless the customer is havin...

Page 897: ... functions are for designer use only 002 Printer 003 SC TRAP Stored 004 Decompression 005 Scanner 006 JOB SAF 007 Reconstruction 008 JBIG 009 Fax Driver 010 G3 CCU 011 Fax Job 012 CCU 013 Scanner Condition 108 IP Protocol Dump List 001 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the IP fax line 002 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the last communicati...

Page 898: ... XXX TESTS These are the test modes for PTT approval 7 Function 101 G3 1 Modem Tests 102 G3 1 DTMF Tests 103 Ringer Test 104 G3 1 V34 S2400baud 105 G3 1 V34 S2800baud 106 G3 1 V34 S3000baud 107 G3 1 V34 S3200baud 108 G3 1 V34 S3429baud 109 Recorded Message Test ...

Page 899: ...ot listed in this manual Refer to the System Parameter List printed by the machine 4 2 1 SYSTEM SWITCHES System Switch 00 SP No 1 101 001 No Function Comments 0 Dedicated transmission parameter programming 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated transmission parameters This setting is automatically reset to 0 after turning off and on 1 Not used Do not change this setti...

Page 900: ...mple The four digit hexadecimal value N after L indicates the RX level The high byte is given first followed by the low byte Divide the decimal value of N by 16 to get the RX level In the above example the decimal value of N 0100 H is 256 So the actual RX level is 256 16 16 dB 3 Not used Do not change this setting 4 Line error mark print 0 OFF 1 ON print When 1 is selected a line error mark is pri...

Page 901: ...ers Modem rate 336 33600 bps 168 16800 bps 312 31200 bps 144 14400 bps 288 28800 bps 120 12000 bps 264 26400 bps 96 9600 bps 240 24000 bps 72 7200 bps 216 21600 bps 48 4800 bps 192 19200 bps 24 2400 bps Resolution S Standard 8 x 3 85 dots mm D Detail 8 x 7 7 dots mm F Fine 8 x 15 4 dots mm SF Superfine 16 x 15 4 dots mm 21 Standard 200 x 100 dpi 22 Detail 200 x 200 dpi Compression mode MMR MMR com...

Page 902: ... Forced reset after transmission stalls 0 Off 1 On With this setting on the machine resets itself automatically if a transmission stalls and fails to complete the job 3 Not used Do not change these settings 4 File retention time 0 Depends on User Parameter 24 18 H 1 No limit 1 A file that had a communication error will not be erased unless the communication is successful 5 7 Do not change this set...

Page 903: ...settings System Switch 09 SP No 1 101 010 No Function Comments 0 Addition of image data from confidential transmissions on the transmission result report 0 Disabled 1 Enabled If this feature is enabled the top half of the first page of confidential messages will be printed on transmission result reports 1 Print timing of communication reports on the Journal when no image data was exchanged 0 After...

Page 904: ...only for communications with errors NOTE The memory size is limited Use this bit switch only when some log reports are necessary 7 Not used Do not change this setting System Switch 0A SP No 1 101 011 No Function Comments 0 Automatic port selection 0 Disabled 1 Enabled When 1 is selected a suitable port is automatically selected if the selected port is not used NOTE This bit is useful if all commun...

Page 905: ... function is on during sending Setting this switch to 1 enables direct sending without capture Setting this switch to 0 masks the direct sending function on the operation panel so direct sending with ScanRouter cannot be selected 3 Action when the external handset goes off hook 0 Manual TX and RX operation 1 Memory TX and RX operation the display remains the same 0 Manual TX is possible while the ...

Page 906: ...dresses Cross reference NCU country code SP No 2 103 001 for G3 1 SP No 2 104 001 for G3 2 SP No 2 105 001 for G3 3 00 France 12 Asia 01 Germany 13 Japan 02 UK 14 Hong Kong 03 Italy 15 South Africa 04 Austria 16 Australia 05 Belgium 17 New Zealand 06 Denmark 18 Singapore 07 Finland 19 Malaysia 08 Ireland 1A China 09 Norway 1B Taiwan 0A Sweden 1C Korea 0B Switz 1D Brazil 0C Portugal 20 Turkey 0D Ho...

Page 907: ...f paper 1 2 Not used Do not change these settings 3 TTI used for broadcasting 0 The TTIs selected for each Quick Speed dial are used 1 The same TTI is used for all destinations 1 The TTI TTI_1 or TTI_2 which is selected for all destinations during broadcasting 4 7 Not used Do not change these settings System Switch 12 SP No 1 101 019 No Function Comments 0 7 TTI printing position in the main scan ...

Page 908: ... of the operation switch is flashing instead of entering Energy Saver mode Use this setting if an external telephone has to be used when the machine is in the Energy Saver mode 2 3 Not used Do not change these settings 4 5 Interval for preventing the machine from entering Energy Saver mode if there is a pending transmission file If there is a file waiting for transmission the machine does not go t...

Page 909: ...26 No Function Comments 0 5 Not used Do not change the settings 6 Extended scanner page memory after memory option is installed 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 After installing the memory expansion option the scanner page memory is extended to 4 MB from 2 MB 1 If this bit is set to 1 after installing the memory expansion option the scanner page memory is extended to 12 MB But the SAF memory decreases to 18...

Page 910: ... 512 KB If a customer wants available memory size to be larger decrease this threshold System Switch 1B Not used do not change these settings System Switch 1C Not used do not change these settings System Switch 1D SP No 1 101 030 No Function Comments 0 RTI CSI CPS code display 0 Enable 1 Disable 0 RTI CSI CPS codes are displayed on the top line of the LCD panel during communication 1 Codes are swi...

Page 911: ...he report e g no paper 1 Action when the SAF memory has become full during scanning 0 The current page is erased 1 The entire file is erased 0 If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning for a memory transmission the successfully scanned pages are transmitted 1 If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning for a memory transmission the file is erased and no pages are transmitted This setting i...

Page 912: ...o not change the settings This setting can be used for the client machine which has no FCU System Switch 1F SP No 1 101 032 No Function Comments 0 Not used Do not change the settings 1 Report printout after an original jam during SAF storage or if the SAF memory fills up 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 0 When an original jams or the SAF memory overflows during scanning a report will be printed Change this bi...

Page 913: ...a fax SC has occurred 0 Automatic reset 1 Fax unit stops 0 When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other than SC1201 and SC1207 the fax unit automatically resets itself 1 When the fax unit detects any fax SC code the fax unit stops Reference For fax SC codes see Troubleshooting ...

Page 914: ... receive Bits 3 to 6 are reserved for future use or not used 0 A4 1 B4 2 A3 3 6 Reserved 7 Not used 0 Off not selected 1 On selected If more than one of these three bits is set to 1 the larger size has priority For example if both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to 1 then the maximum size is A3 Bit 2 When mail is sent there is no negotiation with the receiving machine at the destination so the sending mac...

Page 915: ... transmission 0 Off No conversion 1 On Conversion When on set to 1 the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver to determine the setting mail cannot negotiate between terminals the mm inch selection is determined by the sender fax When this switch is Of...

Page 916: ... mail addresses for example 0 Prints 1st page only 1 Prints all pages 2 3 Text String for Return Receipt This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the transmission was received normally at the destination 00 Dispatched Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt Receives the Return Receipt with dispatched in the 2nd part Disposition Automatic action ...

Page 917: ...ough SAF Store and Forward memory to receive images at 400 x 400 resolution I fax Switch 03 Not used do not change these settings I fax Switch 04 SP No 1 102 005 No Function Comments 0 Subject for Delivery TX Memory Transfer This setting determines whether the RTI CSI registered on this machine or the RTI CSI of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents 0 Puts the RTI CS...

Page 918: ...up for memory sending delivery by F code sending with SMTP RX and when operators are using FOL to prevent problems when receiving transmissions 2 7 Not Used I fax Switch 05 SP No 1 102 006 No Function Comments 0 Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients Determines whether the e mail addresses of the destinations that receive transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journ...

Page 919: ... stores fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location and also holds incoming messages if they cannot be printed When the amount of SAF memory available falls below this setting mail can no longer be received received mail is then stored on the mail server 00 FF 0 to 1024 KB HEX The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the amount of memory I fax S...

Page 920: ... results In response to IEEE2600 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Setting 0 0 No sign 0 1 No setting 1 0 Individual setting 1 1 Always sign 4 5 Select the signature when sending mail In response to IEEE2600 1 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting 0 0 No sign 0 1 No setting 1 0 Individual setting 1 1 Always sign 6 7 Not used Do not change the settings I fax Switch 0E Not used do not change the settings I fax Switch 0F SP No 1 102 016 ...

Page 921: ... 7 Not used 4 3 2 PRINTER SWITCHES Printer Switch 00 SP No 1 103 001 No Function Comments 0 Select page separation marks 0 Off 1 On 0 If a 2 page RX transmission is split is printed in the bottom right corner of the 1st page and only a 2 is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page 1 If a 2 page RX transmission is split into two pages for example 2 is printed in the bottom right corner of ...

Page 922: ...e 3 7 Not used Do not change the settings Printer Switch 01 SP No 1 103 002 No Function Comments 0 6 Not used Do not change the settings 7 Received message width restriction in the protocol signal to the sender 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 The machine informs the transmitting machine of the print width depending on the paper size available from the paper feed stations Refer to the table on the next page...

Page 923: ...ports Do not disable usage for a paper feed station which has been specified by User Parameter Switch 0F 15 or which is used for the Specified Cassette Selection feature 1 2nd paper feed station usage for fax printing 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 2 3rd paper feed station usage for fax printing 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 3 4th paper feed station usage for fax printing 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 4 LCT usage for fax pri...

Page 924: ... with switch 03 0 above For example if this setting is set to 10 and A4 is the selected paper size If the received document is 10 mm or less longer than A4 then the 10 mm are cut and only 1 page prints If the received document is 10 mm longer than A4 then the document is split into 2 pages This setting can be used for the client machine which has no FCU Printer Switch 04 SP No 1 103 005 No Functio...

Page 925: ...t change the settings Printer Switch 06 SP No 1 103 007 No Function Comments 0 Printing while a paper cassette is pulled out when the Just Size Printing feature is enabled 0 Printing will not start 1 Printing will start if another cassette has a suitable size of paper based on the paper size selection priority tables Reference Just size printing on off User switch 05 bit 5 1 7 Not used Do not chan...

Page 926: ...size selection priority 0 Width 1 Length 0 A paper size that has the same width as the received data is selected first 1 A paper size which has enough length to print all the received lines without reduction is selected first 1 Paper size selected for printing A4 width fax data 0 8 5 x 11 size 1 A4 size This switch determines which paper size is selected for printing A4 width fax data when the mac...

Page 927: ...ken place all the pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio 1 Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected paper size when page separation has taken place Other pages are printed without reduction This setting can be used for the client machine which has no FCU Printer Switch 0F SP No 1 103 016 No Function Comments 0 1 Smoothing feature 0 0 0 1 Disable smoothing if the machine receives ...

Page 928: ...rection for Duplex printing 0 Left binding 1 Top binding 0 Sets the binding for the left edge of the stack 1 Sets the binding for the top of the stack 4 7 Not used Do not change the settings This setting can be used for the client machine which has no FCU ...

Page 929: ... the machine 4 4 1 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES Communication Switch 00 SP No 1 104 001 No Function Comments 0 1 Compression modes available in receive mode These bits determine the compression capabilities to be declared in phase B handshaking of the T 30 protocol Bit 1 Bit 0 Modes 0 0 MH only 0 1 MH MR 1 0 MH MR MMR 1 1 MH MR MMR JBIG 2 3 Compression modes available in transmit mode These bits determi...

Page 930: ... only available in NSF NSS mode Communication Switch 01 SP No 1 104 002 No Function Comments 0 ECM 0 Off 1 On If this bit is set to 0 ECM is switched off for all communications In addition V 8 protocol and JBIG compression are switched off automatically 1 Not used Do not change the setting 2 3 Wrong connection prevention method 0 1 The machine will disconnect the line without sending a fax message...

Page 931: ... exchange in the DIS NSF frames Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting 0 0 No limit 0 1 B4 364 mm 1 0 A4 297 mm 1 1 Not used Communication Switch 02 SP No 1 104 003 No Function Comments 0 G3 Burst error threshold 0 Low 1 High If there are more consecutive error lines in the received page than the threshold the machine will send a negative response The Low and High threshold values depend on the sub scan resolution a...

Page 932: ...tion Switch 03 SP No 1 104 004 No Function Comments 0 7 Maximum number of page retransmissions in a G3 memory transmission 00 FF Hex times This setting is not used if ECM is switched on Default setting 03 H Communication Switch 04 SP No 1 104 005 No Function Comments 0 Remote mode switch TEL mode 0 Disable 1 Enable Active Set this bit to ON when you wish to switch TEL mode to FAX mode remotely 1 R...

Page 933: ...mmunication Switch 09 SP No 1 104 009 No Function Comments 0 7 Minimum interval between automatic dialing attempts This value is the minimum time that the machine waits before it dials the next destination Communication Switch 0A SP No 1 104 011 No Function Comments 0 Point of resumption of memory transmission upon redialing 0 From the error page 1 From page 1 0 The transmission begins from the pa...

Page 934: ... unit 4 Kbytes e g 06 H 24 Kbytes One page is about 24 Kbytes The machine refers to this setting before each fax reception If the amount of remaining memory is below this threshold the machine cannot receive any fax messages If this setting is kept at 0 the machine will detect ringing signals and go into receive mode even if there is no memory available This will result in communication failure Co...

Page 935: ...settings Communication Switch 14 SP No 1 104 021 No Function Comments 0 Inch to mm conversion during transmission 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 In immediate transmission data scanned in inch format are transmitted without conversion In memory transmission data stored in the SAF memory in mm format are transmitted without conversion Note When storing the scanned data into SAF memory the fax unit always co...

Page 936: ...munication Switch 16 SP No 1 104 023 No Function Comments 0 Not used Do not change the settings 1 Optional G3 unit G3 2 0 Not installed 1 Installed Change this bit to 1 when installing the first optional G3 unit 2 Not used 3 Select PSTN connection 0 Off 1 On This switch enables the G3 2 0 Off no connection 1 Recognizes and enables G3 2 This switch can be used only after G3 2 has been installed 4 7...

Page 937: ...in number to each address 6 Not used Do not change the settings 7 Action when there is no box with an F code that matches the received SUB code 0 Disconnect the line 1 Receive the message using normal reception mode Change this setting when the customer requires Communication Switch 18 SP No 1 104 025 No Function Comments 0 4 Not used Do not change the settings 5 IP Fax dial in routing selection 0...

Page 938: ...ialed number it automatically disables V 8 protocol Alternatively if 3 is the PSTN access code set bit 3 to 1 Communication Switch 1C SP No 1 104 029 No Function Comments 0 1 Extension access code 8 and 9 to turn V 8 protocol On Off 0 On 1 Off Refer to communication switch 1B Example If 8 is the PSTN access code set bit 0 to 1 When the machine detects 8 as the first dialed number it automatically ...

Page 939: ...or speaker during communication TX and RX 0 0 The monitor speaker is disabled all through the communication 0 1 The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in the T 30 protocol 1 0 Used for testing The monitor speaker is on all through the communication Make sure that you reset these bits after testing Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled 0 1 Up to Phase B 1 0 All the time 1 1 Not used 2 Monitor speaker d...

Page 940: ...tch 02 SP No 1 105 003 No Function Comments 0 G3 protocol mode used 0 Standard and non standard 1 Standard only Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can only communicate with machines that send T 30 standard frames only 1 Disables NSF NSS signals these are used in non standard mode communication 1 6 Not used Do not change the settings 7 Short preamble 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Refer to Appendix...

Page 941: ...smitted 1 When using ECM the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after receiving four PPRs PPR CTC These are ECM protocol signals This bit is not effective in V 34 communications 5 Modem rate used for the next page after receiving a negative code RTN or PIN 0 No change 1 Fallback 1 The machine s TX modem rate will fall back before sending the next page if a negative code is received Th...

Page 942: ... Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you need to change this for specific receivers If a modem rate 14 4 kbps or slower is selected V 8 protocol should be disabled manually Cross reference V 8 protocol on off G3 switch 03 bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 kbps 0 0 0 1 2 4 0 0 1 0 4 8 0 0 1 1 7 2 0 1 0 0 9 6 0 1 0 1 12 0 0 1 1 0 14 4 0 1 1 1 16 8 1 0 0 0 19 2 1 0 0 1 21 6 1 0 1 0 24 0 1 0 1 1 ...

Page 943: ...l starting modem rate for reception Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems during reception If a modem rate 14 4 kbps or slower is selected V 8 protocol should be disabled manually Cross reference V 8 protocol on off G3 switch 03 bit2 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 kbps 0 0 0 1 2 4 0 0 1 0 4 8 0 0 1 1 7 2 0 1 0 0 9 6 0 1 0 1 12 0 0 1 1 0 14 4 0 1 1 1 16 8 1 0 0 0 19 2 1 0 0 1 21 6 1 0 1 0 24 0 ...

Page 944: ...ettings Not used G3 Switch 07 SP No 1 105 008 No Function Comments 0 1 PSTN cable equalizer TX mode Internal Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange Use the dedicated transmission parameters for specific receivers Also try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following symptoms occurs C...

Page 945: ...1 Enabled Keep this bit at 1 5 Not used Do not change the settings 6 Parameter selection for dial tone detection 0 Normal parameter 1 Specific parameter 0 This uses the fixed table in the ROM for dial tone detection 1 This uses the specific parameter adjusted with SRAM 69ECBEH 69ECDEH Select this if the dial tone cannot be detected when the Normal parameter 0 is selected 7 Not used Do not change t...

Page 946: ...EOL end of line signals and the maximum interval between ECM frames from the other end Try using a longer setting if error code 0 21 is frequent 5 Not used Do not change the settings 6 Reconstruction time for the first line in receive mode 0 6 s 1 12 s When the sending terminal is controlled by a computer there may be a delay in receiving page data after the local machine accepts set up data and s...

Page 947: ...e signals from the handset when remote switch is active 6 7 Not used Do not change the settings G3 Switch 0D Not used do not change the settings G3 Switch 0E SP No 1 105 015 No Function Comments 0 7 Set CNG send time interval Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the 3 second CNG interval High order bit 3000 2250ms 3000 50xNms 3000 50 x Nms 0F 3000 ms N FF 225...

Page 948: ...he handset is off hook at the end of communication 0 Disabled 1 Enabled If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the handset is off hook at the end of fax communication change this bit to 1 2 3 Not used Do not change these settings 4 Manual calibration setting 0 Off 1 On 1 manually calibrates for communication with a line whose current change occurs such as an optical fiber line 5 7 Not used Do n...

Page 949: ...No 1 111 001 No Function Comments 0 Not used Do not change this setting 1 IP Fax Transport 0 TCP 1 UDP Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP Fax 2 IP Fax single port selection 0 OFF 1 ON enable Selects single data port 3 IP Fax double ports single data port selection 0 OFF 1 ON enable Selects whether IP Fax uses a double port 4 IP Fax Gatekeeper 0 OFF 1 ON enable Enables disables the gatekeeper for I...

Page 950: ... fails the line is disconnected IP Fax Switch 01 SP No 1 111 002 No Function Comments 0 3 IP Fax delay level setting Selects the acceptable delay level Level 0 is the highest quality Default is 0000 level 0 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 0 0 Level 0 0 0 0 1 Level 1 0 0 1 0 Level 2 0 0 1 1 Level 3 4 7 IP Fax preamble wait time setting Selects the preamble wait time 00 to 0f There are 16 values in this...

Page 951: ...er has both TCP and UDP 3 CCM connection 0 No CCM connection 1 CCM connection When 1 is selected only the connection call message with H 323 or no tunneled H 245 is transmitted via CCM 4 Message reception selection from non registered SIP server 0 Answer 1 Not answer 0 This answers the INVITE message from the SIP server not registered for the machine 1 This does not receive the INVITE message from...

Page 952: ...ion times for echo prevention 0 1 time 1 2 times Sets the number of times for DIS to detect echoes 5 CTC transmission selection 0 PPRx1 1 PPRx4 When 0 is selected the transmission condition is decided by error frame numbers When 1 is selected the transmission condition is based on the ITU T method 6 Shift down setting at receiving negative code 0 OFF 1 ON Selects whether to shift down when negativ...

Page 953: ...on Sets the modem type for transmission The default is 00 V29 Bit 5 Bit 4 Types 0 0 V29 0 1 V17 1 0 Not used 1 1 Not used 6 7 Not used Do not change these settings IP Fax Switch 06 SP No 1 111 007 No Function Comments 0 3 Modem bit rate setting for reception Sets the modem bit rate for reception The default is 0110 14 4K bps 4 7 Modem setting for reception Sets the modem type for reception The def...

Page 954: ... reception disabled 0 No hang up 1 Hang up after transmitting DCN Sets whether the machine disconnects after DIS reception 4 Number of times for training 0 1 time 1 2 times Selects the number of times training is done at the same bit rate 5 Space CSI transmission setting at no CSI registration 0 Not transmitted 1 Transmitted When 0 is selected frame data is enabled When 1 is selected the transmitt...

Page 955: ...rval timer The default is 00 75 seconds Bit 5 Bit 4 0 0 75 s 0 1 120 s 1 0 180 s 1 1 240 s 6 7 Not used Do not change these settings IP Fax Switch 09 SP No 1 111 010 No Function Comments 0 Network I F setting for SIP connection 0 IPv4 1 IPv6 Selects the connection type IPV4 or IPV6 to connect to the SIP server 1 Network I F setting for Fax communication 0 Same setting as SIP server connection 1 Au...

Page 956: ...clare T38VendorInfo RICOH 1 Not declare T38VendorInfo RICOH 0 Use this setting normally 1 This setting is used only when a customer wants to connect the machine with SIP server VOIP GW provided by AVAYA Inc 6 7 Not used Do not change these settings IP Fax Switch 0A Not used do not change the settings IP Fax Switch 0B Not used do not change the settings IP Fax Switch 0C Not used do not change the s...

Page 957: ...55 D256 FAX OPTION D255 D256 FAX OPTION 2 3 SIP IP FAX port mode TCP 00 3 port mode 01 2 port mode 10 1 port mode Switch the port mode for IP FAX T38 transport TCP at SIP call control 4 7 Not used Do not change these settings ...

Page 958: ...med in hex code unless BCD is included in the Unit column The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU RAM Addr Function Remarks CC 680500 Country Area code for NCU parameters Use the Hex value to program the country area code directly into this address or use the decimal value to program it using SP2 103 001 Country Code List Country Area Decimal Hex Country Area Decimal Hex Fra...

Page 959: ...05 680575 Acceptable ringing signal frequency range 2 lower limit SP2 103 006 06 680576 Number of rings until a call is detected 1 SP2 103 007 The setting must not be zero 07 680577 Minimum required length of the first ring 20 ms See Note B SP2 103 008 08 680578 Minimum required length of the second and subsequent rings 20 ms SP2 103 009 09 680579 Ringing signal detection reset time LOW 20 ms SP2 ...

Page 960: ... SP2 103 020 See Note C 20 680553 Tone attenuation value difference between high frequency tone and low frequency tone in DTMF signals dBm x 0 5 SP2 103 021 The setting must be less than 5dBm and should not exceed the setting at 680552h above See Note C 21 680554 PSTN DTMF tone attenuation level after dialling N x 0 5 3 5 dBm SP2 103 022 See Note C 22 680555 ISDN DTMF tone attenuation level after ...

Page 961: ...ote N680552 for example means the value stored in address 680552 H D 68054A Europe Between Ds opening and Di opening France Between Ds closing and Di opening 68054D Europe Between Ds closing and Di closing France Between Ds opening and Di closing E 68054A 68054D 68054E The actual inter digit pause pulse dial mode is the sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A 68054D and 68054E ...

Page 962: ...book that you want to program 4 For the fax parameter select Fax Dest for the E mail parameter select Email then press Start 5 The settings for the switch 00 are now displayed Press the bit number that you wish to change To scroll through the parameter switches press Next or Previous 6 After the setting is changed press OK 7 After finishing reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0 4 8 2 PARAMETERS...

Page 963: ...3 0 0 1 0 0 4 0 1 1 1 1 15 1 1 1 1 1 Disabled 5 7 Cable equalizer Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 None Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 1 Low Bit 7 0 Bit 6 1 Bit 5 0 Medium Bit 7 0 Bit 6 1 Bit 5 1 High Bit 7 1 Bit 6 1 Bit 5 1 Disabled Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange when calling the number stored in this Qui...

Page 964: ... slower Switch 04 bit 4 must be changed to 0 Do not use settings other than listed on the left If the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 bps 0 0 0 0 Not used 0 0 0 1 2400 0 0 1 0 4800 0 0 1 1 7200 0 1 0 0 9600 0 1 0 1 12000 0 1 1 0 14400 0 1 1 1 16800 1 0 0 0 19200 1 0 0 1 21600 1 0 1 0 24000 1 0 1 1 26400 1 1 0 0 28800 1 1 0 1 31200 1 1 1 0 33600 1 1 1 1 Disabl...

Page 965: ...t of transmission The machine will then wait for the second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS If the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used 4 V 8 protocol 0 Off 1 Disabled If transmissions to a specific destination always end at a lower modem rate 14 400 bps or lower disable V 8 protocol so as not to use V 34 protocol 0 V 34 communication will not be possible If the setting is Disab...

Page 966: ...mpression mode for e mail attachments 0 Off 1 On Switches MH compression on and off for files attached to e mails for sending 1 MR Compression mode for e mail attachments 0 Off 1 On Switches MR compression on and off for files attached to e mails for sending 2 MMR Compression mode for e mail attachments 0 Off 1 On Switches MMR compression on and off for files attached to e mails for sending 3 6 No...

Page 967: ...nal width of the e mail attachment as A3 3 6 Not used Do not change these settings 7 Designates the bits to reference for original size of e mail attachments 0 Registered Bit 0 to 6 1 No registration The 0 selection default references the settings for Bits 00 01 02 above The 1 selection ignores the selections of Bit 00 Switch 02 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Line resolution of e mail attachment 200 x 100...

Page 968: ...6 1 No registration The 0 selection default references the settings for Bits 00 01 02 04 above The 1 selection ignores the selections of Bits 00 01 02 04 Switch 03 Not used do not change the settings Switch 04 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Full mode address selection 0 Full mode address 1 No full mode simple mode If the other ends have the addresses which have the full mode function flag 0 this machine d...

Page 969: ... to SMTP server 0 ON 1 OFF Allows or does not allow the direct transmission to SMTP server 1 7 Not used Do not change these settings Switch 06 Not used do not change the settings Switch 07 Not used do not change the settings Switch 08 Not used do not change the settings Switch 09 Not used do not change the settings ...

Page 970: ...m high 680020 to 68003F H System bit switches 680050 to 68005F H Printer bit switches 680060 to 68007F H Communication bit switches 680080 to 68008F H G3 bit switches 680090 to 68009F H G3 2 bit switches Not used 6800A0 to 6800AF H G3 3 bit switches Not used 6800D0 H User parameter switch 00 SWUER_00 Not used 6800D1 H User parameter switch 01 SWUSR_01 Not used 6800D2 H User parameter switch 02 SWU...

Page 971: ...f a sample image on reports 0 Off 1 On 6800D5 H User parameter switch 05 SWUSR_05 Bit 0 Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Bits 1 and 2 Condition for substitute RX when the machine cannot print messages Paper end toner end jam and during night mode Bit 2 0 Bit 1 0 The machine receives all the fax messages Bit 2 0 Bit 1 1 The machine receives the fa...

Page 972: ...Use both e mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission results 0 Off 1 On Bit 7 Not used 6800DB H User parameter switch 11 SWUSR_0B Bits 0 and 1 Not used Bit 2 White original detection 0 Off 1 On alarm and alert message on the LCD Bit 3 Receive rejection for 1300 Hz transmission 0 Off receive 1 On not receive Bit 5 Not used Bit 6 Printout of messages received while acting as ...

Page 973: ...ty for an A4 size fax message when A4 LT size paper is not available 0 A3 has priority 1 B4 has priority Bits 3 to 7 Not used 6800E1 H User parameter switch 17 SWUSR_11 Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 Not used Bit 2 Inclusion of the Add button when a sequence of Quick Speed dials is selected for broadcasting 0 Not needed 1 Needed Bits 3 to 6 Not used Bit 7 Press Start key without an original when using the o...

Page 974: ...could not be printed from PC fax LAN fax driver Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 0 0 0 0 min 0 0 0 1 1 min 1 1 1 0 14 min 1 1 1 1 15 min Bits 6 and 7 Not used 6800E5 H User parameter switch 21 SWUSR_15 Bit 0 Print results of sending reception notice request message 0 Disabled print only when error occurs 1 Enabled Bit 1 Respond to e mail reception acknowledgment request 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 2...

Page 975: ...ess 2 Folder 3 IP fax destination 4 Fax number Bits 1 to 7 Not used 6800F1 H User parameter switch 33 SWUSR_21 Not used 6800F2 H User parameter switch 34 SWUSR_22 Bit 0 Gatekeeper server used with IP Fax 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 1 SIP server used with IP Fax 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bits 2 to 7 Not used 6800F3 H User parameter switch 35 SWUSR_23 Redial interval when sending a backup file 6800F4 H User...

Page 976: ...ace for storage of new faxes 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 1 to 7 Not used 6800FD H User parameter switch 45 SWUSR_2D Bit 0 and 1 Bit 2 File format for files transmitted to e mail addresses and folders registered as forwarding destinations of backup file transmission receivers for Personal Box or end receivers for Transfer Box 0 PDF 1 PDF A Bit 3 Bit 4 to 7 Not used 680100 to 68010F H G4 Parameter Swit...

Page 977: ...M 1 EXP 680453 H Printing format for TTI 5 0 DOM 1 EXP 680454 H Printing format for TTI 6 0 DOM 1 EXP 680455 H Printing format for TTI 7 0 DOM 1 EXP 680456 H Printing format for TTI 8 0 DOM 1 EXP 680457 H Printing format for TTI 9 0 DOM 1 EXP 680458 H Printing format for TTI 10 0 DOM 1 EXP 680459 to 68046C H PSTN 1 CSI Max 20 characters ASCII 68046D to 680480 H PSTN 2 CSI Max 20 characters ASCII 6...

Page 978: ... Check ram 3 680500 H Start address of G3 table for G3 1 680600 H Start address of G3 table for G3 2 680700 H Start address of G3 table for G3 3 680800 to 68081F H Service station s fax number SP3 101 680820 to 680829 H Own fax PABX extension number Not used 68082A to 680833 H Own fax number PSTN Not used 680834 to 680847 H Own fax number ISDN G4 Not used 680848 to 680853 H The first subscriber nu...

Page 979: ... 00 07 H 68096F H Beeper volume 00 07 H 680980 H Machine code Check ram 4 680982 H Machine serial number ASCII 687178 to 68717B H Transmission counter Max 24 characters ASCII 68717C to 68717F H Reception counter Max 24 characters ASCII 6871E8 to 6871EB H Mail transmission counter Max 24 characters ASCII 6871EC to 6871EF H Mai reception counter Max 24 characters ASCII 6A6DEE H to 6A70ED H SIP serve...

Page 980: ...0 H 323 1 SIP 6A9079 H SIP function 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6A907A H H 323 function 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6A907B H SIP digest authentication function 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6B3AE4 H 6B3B04 H Dial tone detection parameter Max 11 x 3 lines This initializes following order 0x04 0x40 0x03 0x60 0x64 0xf4 0x01 0x64 0x04 0xc8 0x00 6B3AE4 H Dial tone detection frequency Upper limit High Defaults NA 06 EU 06 ASI...

Page 981: ...Service RAM Addresses SM 147 D255 D256 FAX OPTION D255 D256 FAX OPTION Defaults NA 64 EU 1B ASIA 32 6B3AEC H Dial tone disconnect permission time 20 ms Defaults NA 11 EU 0F ASIA 11 ...

Page 982: ...6 FAX OPTION 148 SM 5 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 5 1 OVERVIEW The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features in cooperation with the controller board Also the FCU contains the ROM SRAM and NCU circuits ...

Page 983: ...copier s engine and all the fax options FACE3 5 Fax Application Control Engine CPU Data compression and reconstruction DCR DMA control Clock generation DRAM backup control Modem FAME2 V 34 V33 V17 V 29 V 27ter V 21 and V 8 DRAM The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows SAF memory 4MB Working memory 4MB Page memory 4MB The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery ...

Page 984: ...he 512 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a lithium battery SRAM Back up A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in the SRAM in case the base copier s main power switch is turned off Switches Item Description SW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on off CPU This controls the energy efficient operation of the FCU board ...

Page 985: ... BiCU uses the MTF independent dot erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit s scanner bit switches not the copier s SP modes Then the FCU converts the data to mm format and compresses the data in MMR or raw format to store it in the SAF memory If image rotation will be done the image is rotated in page memory before compression At the time of transmission the FCU decomp...

Page 986: ...presses the data for transmission The NCU transmits the data to the line JBIG Transmission Memory transmission If the receiver has JBIG compression the data goes from the DCR to the QM Coder Then the NCU transmits the data to the line Immediate transmission If the receiver has JBIG compression the data goes from the page memory to the QM Coder Then the NCU transmits the data to the line 5 3 2 RECE...

Page 987: ...e is rotated in the page memory The data is transferred to the BiCU JBIG Reception When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN 1 the standard analog line the data is sent to the QM CODER for decompression Then the data is stored in the page memory and transferred to the BiCU ...

Page 988: ...ses and or reduces the data if necessary for transmission The NCU transmits the data to the line The documents can be stored in the HDD Document Server from the fax application The stored documents in the document sever can be used for the fax transmission in many times More than one document and the scanned document can be combined into one file and then the file can be transmitted When using the...

Page 989: ...full mode is as follows Function T 37 Simple Mode T 37 Full Mode Resolution 200 x 100 200 x 200 200 x100 200 x 200 200 x 400 400 x 400 if available RX Paper Width A4 8 5 x 14 A4 B4 A3 RX Data Compression Method MH MH default MR MMR Signals Image data transmission only Image data transmission exchange of capability information between the two terminals and acknowledgement of receipt of fax messages...

Page 990: ...e destination e mail address gts ricoh co jp is read as the SMTP server address gts abcd com and the transmissions bypass the SMTP server Selectable Options These options are available for selection With the default settings the scan resolution can be either standard or detail Inch mm conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7 Detail resolution will be used if Super Fine resolution is selecte...

Page 991: ...if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX mail cannot be received with SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled However if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the MX record of the DNS server then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used depending on the setting User Tools Machine Features System Settings File Transfer Reception Protocol Mail Delivery Conditions Transferring ...

Page 992: ...utput If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered and if the incoming mail specifies a delivery destination then the mail is delivered unconditionally Handling Mail Reception Errors Abnormal files When an error of this type occurs the machine stops receiving and commands the server to erase the message Then the machine prints an error report and sends information about the error by e mail ...

Page 993: ...l files If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception the machine operates in the same way as when receiving an abnormal file refer to Abnormal files above Secure Internet Reception To enable password encryption and higher level security User Tools Machine Features System Settings File Transfer POP3 IMAP4 Settings Encryption set to On Transfer Request Request By Mail For details...

Page 994: ... Mode E mail Options The Subject entry for the mail being sent is limited to 64 characters The subject can also be prefixed with an Urgent or High notation How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type Mail Type Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Subject Entry Entry Condition Fax Message No File No No Subject Entry 1 CSI RTI 2 RTI CSI not registered 3 CSI RTI not registered 4 None CSI RTI not registered Confir...

Page 995: ... of sender SMTP receiving and delivery Off Ramp Gateway Mail error notification Error Message No xxxx From CSI RTI Items 1 2 and 3 in the table above are in the Subject Subjects Displayed on the PC E mail Messages After entering the subject you can enter a message with Sub TX Mode E mail Options An e mail message up to 5 lines can be pre registered with User Tools Machine Features System Settings ...

Page 996: ...up the Receiving Party The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if 1 The Disposition Notification To field is in the received mail header automatically inserted in the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page if MDN is enabled and 2 Sending the disposition notification must be enabled User Parameter Setting SW21 15 H Bit 1 for this model The content of the response is a...

Page 997: ...mn If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list i e a Group destination the machine sends the mail to more than one location See How to set up Mail Delivery the Result column of the Journal is updated every time a return receipt is received For example if the mailing list was to 5 destinations the Result column indicates the result of the communication with the 5th destination o...

Page 998: ... the level by selecting a higher setting if too many transmission errors are occurring on the network If TCP UDP is enabled on the network raise this setting on the T 30 machine Increasing the delay time allows the recovery of more lost packets If only UDP is enabled increase the number of redundant packets Level 1 2 3 Redundant packets Level 3 4 Redundant packets Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Level 0 0...

Page 999: ...th 356 mm 14 0 inch Maximum Width 216 mm 8 5 inch Scanning Method Flat bed with CCD Resolution 8 3 85 lines mm 200 100 dpi Standard character 8 7 7 lines mm 200 200 dpi Detail character Transmission Time 3 seconds at 28 800 bps Standard resolution JBIG transmission 2 seconds Data Compression MH MR MMR JBIG Protocol Group 3 with ECM Modulation TCM V 34 V 17 QAM V 29 V 17 PhM V27ter FSK V 8 V21 Data...

Page 1000: ...umber of destinations you can register in a group 500 Number of destinations you can register into a keystroke program 500 Number of programs you can register in a group 100 Number of communication results you can check on this machine 200 Number of special senders you can register 250 Number of documents you can store in memory for memory transmission 800 Number of pages you can send for memory t...

Page 1001: ...0 100 dpi Communication speed 10 Mbps Correspondent device E mail server Line conditions No terminal access Document Size Maximum Original Size A4 E mail File Format Single Multi part MIME Conversion Attached file fomrs TIFF F MH MR MMR Full mode Protocol Transmission SMTP TCP IP Reception POP3 SMTP IMAP4 TCP IP Data Rate 1000 Mbps 1000 Base T 100 Mbps 100 Base Tx 10 Mbps 10 Base T Authentication ...

Page 1002: ...m 356 mm 8 5 14 0 Transmission protocol Recommendation T 38 TCP UDP IP communication SIP RFC 3261 compliant H 323 v2 Compatible machines IP Fax compatible machines IP Fax transmission function Specify IP address and send faxes to an IP Fax compatible fax through a network Also capable of sending faxes to a G3 fax connected to a telephone line via a VoIP gateway IP Fax reception function Receive fa...

Page 1003: ...Fax Unit Configuration SM 169 D255 D256 FAX OPTION D255 D256 FAX OPTION 6 4 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION No Component 1 FCU 2 Speaker ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for M281 Series

Canon MX490 Series Setup Manual preview
MX490 Series
Brand: Canon Pages: 11
Canon MX490 Series Quick Help Manual preview
MX490 Series
Brand: Canon Pages: 2
Canon Photura 135 Review preview
Photura 135
Brand: Canon Pages: 12
Canon PIXMA Pro9000 Mark II Series Release Note preview
PIXMA Pro9000 Mark II Series
Brand: Canon Pages: 4
Canon i 320 Simplified Manual preview
i 320
Brand: Canon Pages: 18
Canon G1020 Series Getting Started preview
G1020 Series
Brand: Canon Pages: 16
Canon CX-G2400 Getting Started Manual preview
CX-G2400
Brand: Canon Pages: 39
Canon i455 Series Setup Instructions preview
i455 Series
Brand: Canon Pages: 2
Canon i455 Series Quick Start Manual preview
i455 Series
Brand: Canon Pages: 73
Canon i70 Series Quick Start Manual preview
i70 Series
Brand: Canon Pages: 29
Canon i550 Parts Catalog preview
i550
Brand: Canon Pages: 16
Canon i475D Series Printing Manual preview
i475D Series
Brand: Canon Pages: 44
Canon G3410 Getting Started preview
G3410
Brand: Canon Pages: 60
Olympus P 400 Easy Printing Manual preview
P 400
Brand: Olympus Pages: 236
Canon I450 - i 450 Color Inkjet Printer Simplified Manual preview
I450 - i 450 Color Inkjet Printer
Brand: Canon Pages: 13
QMS 4060 Supplementary Manual preview
4060
Brand: QMS Pages: 27
QMS 4060 Accessories Manual preview
4060
Brand: QMS Pages: 3
Océ VarioPrint 1055 User Manual preview
VarioPrint 1055
Brand: Océ Pages: 194

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands